Skip to main content

Full text of "The theory of spectra and atomic constitution; three essays"

See other formats


THE  LIBRARY 

OF 

THE  UNIVERSITY 
OF  CALIFORNIA 

LOS  ANGELES 


DISCARDED 
v,  of  MQ. 


The  Theory  of  Spectra 

and 
Atomic  Constitution 


CAMBRIDGE  UNIVERSITY  PRESS 

C.  F.  CLAY,  MANAGER 
LONDON  :  FETTER    LANE,    E.G.  4 


LONDON  :  H.  K.  LEWIS  AND  CO.,  LTD., 

136  Gower  Street,  W.C.  i 
NEW  YORK  :  THE  MACMILLAN  CO. 
BOMBAY     1 

CALCUTTA  L  MACMILLAN  AND  CO.,  LTD. 
MADRAS     J 
TORONTO   :  THE    MACMILLAN   CO.   OF 

CANADA,  LTD. 
TOKYO  :  MARUZEN-KABUSHIKI-KAISHA 


ALL  RIGHTS  RESERVED 


The  Theory  of  Spectra 

and 

Atomic  Constitution 

THREE  ESSAYS 

BY 
NIELS  BOHR 

Professor  of  Theoretical  Physics  in  the  University  of  Copenhagen 


CAMBRIDGE 

AT  THE  UNIVERSITY  PRESS 
1922 


PRINTED   IN   GREAT   BRITAIN 
AT  THE  CAMBRIDGE  UNIVERSITY  PRESS 


Collegt 
LibrMJT 


PREFACE 

THE  three  essays  which  here  appear  in  English  all  deal  with 
the  application  of  the  quantum  theory  to  problems  of  atomic 
structure,  and  refer  to  the  different  stages  in  the  development  of 
this  theory. 

The  first  essay  "  On  the  spectrum  of  hydrogen"  is  a  translation  of 
a  Danish  address  given  before  the  Physical  Society  of  Copenhagen 
on  the  20th  of  December  1913,  and  printed  in  Fysisk  Tidsskrift, 
xn.  p.  97,  1914.  Although  this  address  was  delivered  at  a  time 
when  the  formal  development  of  the  quantum  theory  was  only  at 
its  beginning,  the  reader  will  find  the  general  trend  of  thought 
very  similar  to  that  expressed  in  the  later  addresses,  which 
form  the  other  two  essays.  As  emphasized  at  several  points  the 
theory  does  not  attempt  an  "explanation"  in  the  usual  sense  of 
this  word,  but  only  the  establishment  of  a  connection  between  facts 
which  in  the  present  state  of  science  are  unexplained,  that  is  to 
say  the  usual  physical  conceptions  do  not  offer  sufficient  basis  for 
a  detailed  description. 

The  second  essay  "On  the  series  spectra  of  the  elements"  is  a 
translation  of  a  German  address  given  before  the  Physical  Society 
of  Berlin  on  the  27th  of  April  1920,  and  printed  in  Zeitschrift  fur 
Physik,  vi.  p.  423,  1920.  This  address  falls  into  two  main  parts. 
The  considerations  in  the  first  part  are  closely  related  to  the  con- 
tents of  the  first  essay  ;  especially  no  use  is  made  of  the  new 
formal  conceptions  established  through  the  later  development  of 
the  quantum  theory.  The  second  part  contains  a  survey  of  the 
results  reached  by  this  development.  An  attempt  is  made  to 
elucidate  the  problems  by  means  of  a  general  principle  which  postu- 
lates a  formal  correspondence  between  the  fundamentally  different 
conceptions  of  the  classical  electrodynamics  and  those  of  the 
quantum  theory.  The  first  germ  of  this  correspondence  principle 
may  be  found  in  the  first  essay  in  the  deduction  of  the  ex- 
pression for  the  constant  of  the  hydrogen  spectrum  in  terms  of 
Planck's  constant  and  of  the  quantities  which  in  Rutherford's 


733173 


vi  PREFACE 

atomic  model  are  necessary  for  the  description  of  the  hydrogen 
atom. 

The  third  essay  "The  structure  of  the  atom  and  the  physical 
and  chemical  properties  of  the  elements"  is  based  on  a  Danish 
address,  given  before  a  joint  meeting  of  the  Physical  and  Chemical 
Societies  of  Copenhagen  on  the  18th  of  October  1921,  and  printed 
in  Fysisk  Tidsskrift,  xix.  p.  153,  1921.  While  the  first  two  essays 
form  verbal  translations  of  the  respective  addresses,  this  essay 
differs  from  the  Danish  original  in  certain  minor  points.  Besides 
the  addition  of  a  few  new  figures  with  explanatory  text,  certain 
passages  dealing  with  problems  discussed  in  the  second  essay  are 
left  out,  and  some  remarks  about  recent  contributions  to  the 
subject  are  inserted.  Where  such  insertions  have  been  introduced 
will  clearly  appear  from  the  text.  This  essay  is  divided  into 
four  parts.  The  first  two  parts  contain  a  survey  of  previous  results 
concerning  atomic  problems  and  a  short  account  of  the  theoretical 
ideas  of  the  quantum  theory.  In  the  following  parts  it  is  shown 
how  these  ideas  lead  to  a  view  of  atomic  constitution  which  seems 
to  offer  an  explanation  of  the  observed  physical  and  chemical 
properties  of  the  elements,  and  especially  to  bring  the  character- 
istic features  of  the  periodic  table  into  close  connection  with  the 
interpretation  of  the  optical  and  high  frequency  spectra  of  the 
elements. 

For  the  convenience  of  the  reader  all  three  essays  are  subdivided 
into  smaller  paragraphs,  each  with  a  headline.  Conforming  to  the 
character  of  the  essays  there  is,  however,  no  question  of  anything 
like  a  full  account  or  even  a  proportionate  treatment  of  the  subject 
stated  in  these  headlines,  the  principal  object  being  to  emphasize 
certain  general  views  in  a  freer  form  than  is  usual  in  scientific 
treatises  or  text  books.  For  the  same  reason  no  detailed  references 
to  the  literature  are  given,  although  an  attempt  is  made  to  mention 
the  main  contributions  to  the  development  of  the  subject.  As 
regards  further  information  the  reader  in  the  case  of  the  second 
essay  is  referred  to  a  larger  treatise  "On  the  quantum  theory  of 
line  spectra,"  two  parts  of  which  have  appeared  in  the  Transactions  of 
the  Copenhagen  Academy  (D.  Kgl.  Danske  Vidensk.  Selsk.  Skrifter, 
8.  Rsekke,  iv.  1, 1  and  II,  1918),  where  full  references  to  the  literature 
may  be  found.  The  proposed  continuation  of  this  treatise,  mentioned 


PREFACE  Vll 

at  several  places  in  the  second  essay,  has  for  various  reasons  been 
delayed,  but  in  the  near  future  the  work  will  be  completed  by  the 
publication  of  a  third  part.  It  is  my  intention  to  deal  more  fully 
with  the  problems  discussed  in  the  third  essay  by  a  larger  syste- 
matic account  of  the  application  of  the  quantum  theory  to  atomic 
problems,  which  is  under  preparation. 

As  mentioned  both  in  the  beginning  and  at  the  end  of  the 
third  essay,  the  considerations  which  it  contains  are  clearly  still 
incomplete  in  character.  This  holds  not  only  as  regards  the 
elaboration  of  details,  but  also  as  regards  the  development  of  the 
theoretical  ideas.  It  may  be  useful  once  more  to  emphasize, 
that — although  the  word  "explanation"  has  been  used  more 
liberally  than  for  instance  in  the  first  essay — we  are  not  concerned 
with  a  description  of  the  phenomena,  based  on  a  well-defined 
physical  picture.  It  may  rather  be  said  that  hitherto  every 
progress  in  the  problem  of  atomic  structure  has  tended  to  emphasize 
the  well-known  "mysteries"  of  the  quantum  theory  more  and  more. 
I  hope  the  exposition  in  these  essays  is  sufficiently  clear,  never- 
theless, to  give  the  reader  an  impression  of  the  peculiar  charm 
which  the  study  of  atomic  physics  possesses  just  on  this  account. 

I  wish  to  express  my  best  thanks  to  Dr  A.  D.  Udden,  University 
of  Pennsylvania,  who  has  undertaken  the  translation  of  the 
original  addresses  into  English,  and  to  Mr  C.  D.  Ellis,  Trinity 
College,  Cambridge,  who  has  looked  through  the  manuscript  and 
suggested  many  valuable  improvements  in  the  exposition  of  the 
subject. 

N.  BOHR. 

COPENHAGEN, 
May  1922. 


CONTENTS 

ESSAY  I 
ON  THE  SPECTRUM  OF  HYDROGEN 

PAGE 

Empirical  Spectral  Laws 1 

Laws  of  Temperature  Radiation 4 

The  Nuclear  Theory  of  the  Atom 7 

Quantum  Theory  of  Spectra 10 

Hydrogen  Spectrum 12 

The  Pickering  Lines 15 

Other  Spectra 18 

ESSAY  II 
ON  THE  SERIES  SPECTRA  OF  THE  ELEMENTS 

I.   INTRODUCTION 20 

II.   GENERAL  PRINCIPLES  OF  THE  QUANTUM  THEORY  OF  SPECTRA  .  23 

Hydrogen  Spectrum 24 

The  Correspondence  Principle 27 

General  Spectral  Laws 29 

Absorption  and  Excitation  of  Radiation 32 

III.  DEVELOPMENT  OF  THE  QUANTUM  THEORY  OF  SPECTRA     .        .  36 
Effect  of  External  Forces  on  the  Hydrogen  Spectrum      .        .  37 

The  Stark  Effect 39 

The  Zeeman  Effect 42 

Central  Perturbations       ....        ^       ...  44 

Relativity  Effect  on  Hydrogen  Lines 46 

Theory  of  Series  Spectra 48 

Correspondence  Principle  and  Conservation  of  Angular  Mo- 
mentum           50 

The  Spectra  of  Helium  and  Lithium 54 

Complex  Structure  of  Series  Lines 58 

IV.  CONCLUSION                                                                            .  59 


CONTENTS 

ESSAY  III 

THE  STRUCTURE  OF  THE  ATOM  AND  THE  PHYSICAL 
AND  CHEMICAL  PROPERTIES  OF  THE  ELEMENTS 

PAGE 

I.  PRELIMINARY 61 

The  Nuclear  Atom 61 

The  Postulates  of  the  Quantum  Theory 62 

Hydrogen  Atom 63 

Hydrogen  Spectrum  and  X-ray  Spectra 65 

The  Fine  Structure  of  the  Hydrogen  Lines      ....  67 

Periodic  Table 69 

Recent  Atomic  Models 74 

II.  SERIES  SPECTRA  AND  THE  CAPTURE  OF  ELECTRONS  BY  ATOMS  .  75 

Arc  and  Spark  Spectra 76 

Series  Diagram 78 

Correspondence  Principle 81 

III.  FORMATION  OF  ATOMS  AND  THE  PERIODIC  TABLE     ...  85 

First  Period.    Hydrogen — Helium 85 

Second  Period.    Lithium — Neon 89 

Third  Period.   Sodium— Argon 95 

Fourth  Period.    Potassium — Krypton 100 

Fifth-Period.    Rubidium— Xenon 108 

Sixth  Period.    Caesium — Niton 109 

Seventh  Period Ill 

Survey  of  the  Periodic  Table 113 

IV.  REORGANIZATION  OF  ATOMS  AND  X-RAY  SPECTRA    .        .        .116 
Absorption  and  Emission  of  X-rays  and  Correspondence  Prin- 
ciple        117 

X-ray  Spectra  and  Atomic  Structure 119 

Classification  of  X-ray  Spectra 121 

CONCLUSION                                   125 


ESSAY  I* 

ON  THE  SPECTRUM  OF  HYDROGEN 

Empirical  spectral  laws.  Hydrogen  possesses  not  only  the 
smallest  atomic  weight  of  all  the  elements,  but  it  also  occupies  a 
peculiar  position  both  with  regard  to  its  physical  and  its  chemical 
properties.  One  of  the  points  where  this  becomes  particularly  ap- 
parent is  the  hydrogen  line  spectrum. 

The  spectrum  of  hydrogen  observed  in  an  ordinary  Geissler  tube 
consists  of  a  series  of  lines,  the  strongest  of  which  lies  at  the  red 
end  of  the  spectrum,  while  the  others  extend  out  into  the  ultra 
violet,  the  distance  between  the  various  lines,  as  well  as  their  in- 
tensities, constantly  decreasing.  In  the  ultra  violet  the  series  con- 
verges to  a  limit. 

Balmer,  as  we  know,  discovered  (1885)  that  it  was  possible  to 
represent  the  wave  lengths  of  these  lines  very  accurately  by  the 
simple  law 


where  R  is  a  constant  and  n  is  a  whole  number.  The  wave  lengths 
of  the  five  strongest  hydrogen  lines,  corresponding  to  n  =  3,  4,  5,  6, 
7,  measured  in  air  at  ordinary  pressure  and  temperature,  and  the 

values  of  these  wave  lengths  multiplied  by  f  j  --  3}  are  given  in 
the  following  table: 


3  6563-04        91153-3 

4  4861-49        91152-9 

5  4340-66        91153-9 

6  4101-85         91152-2 

7  3970-25        91153-7 

The  table  shows  that  the  product  is  nearly  constant,  while  the  devia- 
tions are  not  greater  than  might  be  ascribed  to  experimental  errors. 
As  you  already  know,  Balmer's  discovery  of  the  law  relating  to 
the  hydrogen  spectrum  led  to  the  discovery  of  laws  applying  to 
the  spectra  of  other  elements.  The  most  important  work  in  this 
*  Address  delivered  before  the  Physical  Society  in  Copenhagen,  Dec.  20,  1913. 

B.  1 


ON  THE  SPECTRUM  OF  HYDROGEN 


connection  was  done  by  Rydberg  (1890)  and  Ritz  (1908).  Rydberg 
pointed  out  that  the  spectra  of  many  elements  contain  series  of 
lines  whose  wave  lengths  are  given  approximately  by  the  formula 

\_A       R 

\n  (n  -f-  a)'2 ' 

where  A  and  a  are  constants  having  different  values  for  the  various 
series,  while  R  is  a  universal  constant  equal  to  the  constant  in  the 
spectrum  of  hydrogen.  If  the  wave  lengths  are  measured  in  vacuo 
Rydberg  calculated  the  value  of  R  to  be  109675.  In  the  spectra  of 
many  elements,  as  opposed  to  the  simple  spectrum  of  hydrogen,  there 
are  several  series  of  lines  whose  wave  lengths  are  to  a  close  approxima- 
tion given  by  Rydberg's  formula  if  different  values  are  assigned  to 
the  constants  A  and  a.  Rydberg  showed,  however,  in  his  earliest 
work,  that  certain  relations  existed  between  the  constants  in  the 
various  series  of  the  spectrum  of  one  and  the  same  element.  These 
relations  were  later  very  successfully  generalized  by  Ritz  through 
the  establishment  of  the  "combination  principle."  According  to 
this  principle,  the  wave  lengths  of  the  various  lines  in  the  spectrum 
of  an  element  may  be  expressed  by  the  formula 


(2) 


In  this  formula  n^  and  nz  are  whole  numbers,  and  Fl  (n),  F^  (n),  ...  is 
a  series  of  functions  of  n,  which  may  be  written  approximately 


where  R  is  Rydberg's  universal  constant  and  ar  is  a  constant  which 
is  different  for  the  different  functions.  A  particular  spectral  line  \vill, 
according  to  this  principle,  correspond  to  each  combination  of  nx 
and  w2,  as  well  as  to  the  functions  Flt  F2,  .  .  .  .  The  establishment  of 
this  principle  led  therefore  to  the  prediction  of  a  great  number  of 
lines  which  were  not  included  in  the  spectral  formulae  previously 
considered,  and  in  a  large  number  of  cases  the  calculations  were 
found  to  be  in  close  agreement  with  the  experimental  observations. 
In  the  case  of  hydrogen  Ritz  assumed  that  formula  (1)  was  a  special 
case  of  the  general  formula 


ON  THE  SPECTRUM  OF  HYDROGEN  3 

and  therefore  predicted  among  other  things  a  series  of  lines  in  the 
infra  red  given  by  the  formula 

1 


In  1909  Paschen  succeeded  in  observing  the  first  two  lines  of  this 
series  corresponding  to  n  =  4  and  n  =  5. 

The  part  played  by  hydrogen  in  the  development  of  our 
knowledge  of  the  spectral  laws  is  not  solely  due  to  its  ordinary 
simple  spectrum,  but  it  can  also  be  traced  in  other  less  direct 
ways.  At  a  time  when  Rydberg's  laws  were  still  in  want  of 
further  confirmation  Pickering  (1897)  found  in  the  spectrum  of  a 
star  a  series  of  lines  whose  wave  lengths  showed  a  very  simple  re- 
lation to  the  ordinary  hydrogen  spectrum,  since  to  a  very  close 
approximation  they  could  be  expressed  by  the  formula 

1 


Rydberg  considered  these  lines  to  represent  a  new  series  of  lines 
in  the  spectrum  of  hydrogen,  and  predicted  according  to  his  theory 
the  existence  of  still  another  series  of  hydrogen  lines  the  wave 
lengths  of  which  would  be  given  by 

1 


By  examining  earlier  observations  it  was  actually  found  that  a  line 
had  been  observed  in  the  spectrum  of  certain  stars  which  coincided 
closely  with  the  first  line  in  this  series  (corresponding  to  n  =  2)  ; 
from  analogy  with  other  spectra  it  was  also  to  be  expected  that  this 
would  be  the  strongest  line.  This  was  regarded  as  a  great  triumph 
for  Rydberg's  theory  and  tended  to  remove  all  doubt  that  the  new 
spectrum  was  actually  due  to  hydrogen.  Rydberg's  view  has  there- 
fore been  generally  accepted  by  physicists  up  to  the  present  moment. 
Recently  however  the  question  has  been  reopened  and  Fowler 
(1912)  has  succeeded  in  observing  the  Pickering  lines  in  ordinary 
laboratory  experiments.  We  shall  return  to  this  question  again 
later. 

The  discovery  of  these  beautiful  and  simple  laws  concerning  the 
line  spectra  of  the  elements  has  naturally  resulted  in  many  attempts 
at  a  theoretical  explanation.  Such  attempts  are  very  alluring 

1—2 


4  ON  THE  SPECTRUM  OF  HYDROGEN 

because  the  simplicity  of  the  spectral  laws  and  the  exceptional  accu- 
racy with  which  they  apply  appear  to  promise  that  the  correct  expla- 
nation will  be  very  simple  and  will  give  valuable  information 
about  the  properties  of  matter.  I  should  like  to  consider  some  of 
these  theories  somewhat  more  closely,  several  of  which  are  extremely 
interesting  and  have  been  developed  with  the  greatest  keenness 
and  ingenuity,  but  unfortunately  space  does  not  permit  me  to  do 
so  here.  I  shall  have  to  limit  myself  to  the  statement  that  not 
one  of  the  theories  so  far  proposed  appears  to  offer  a  satisfactory  or 
even  a  plausible  way  of  explaining  the  laws  of  the  line  spectra. 
Considering  our  deficient  knowledge  of  the  laws  which  determine 
the  processes  inside  atoms  it  is  scarcely  possible  to  give  an  explana- 
tion of  the  kind  attempted  in  these  theories.  The  inadequacy  of 
our  ordinary  theoretical  conceptions  has  become  especially  apparent 
from  the  important  results  which  have  been  obtained  in  recent  years 
from  the  theoretical  and  experimental  study  of  the  laws  of  tem- 
perature radiation.  You  will  therefore  understand  that  I  shall  not 
attempt  to  propose  an  explanation  of  the  spectral  laws;  on  the 
contrary  I  shall  try  to  indicate  a  way  in  which  it  appears  possible 
to  bring  the  spectral  laws  into  close  connection  with  other  pro- 
perties of  the  elements,  which  appear  to  be  equally  inexplicable  on 
the  basis  of  the  present  state  of  the  science.  In  these  considerations 
I  shall  employ  the  results  obtained  from  the  study  of  temperature 
radiation  as  well  as  the  view  of  atomic  structure  which  has  been 
reached  by  the  study  of  the  radioactive  elements. 

Laws  of  temperature  radiation.  I  shall  commence  by  men- 
tioning the  conclusions  which  have  been  drawn  from  experimental 
and  theoretical  work  on  temperature  radiation. 

Let  us  consider  an  enclosure  surrounded  by  bodies  which  are  in 
temperature  equilibrium.  In  this  space  there  will  be  a  certain 
amount  of  energy  contained  in  the  rays  emitted  by  the  surrounding 
substances  and  crossing  each  other  in  every  direction.  By  making 
the  assumption  that  the  temperature  equilibrium  will  not  be  dis- 
turbed by  the  mutual  radiation  of  the  various  bodies  Kirchhoff 
(1860)  showed  that  the  amount  of  energy  per  unit  volume  as  well 
as  the  distribution  of  this  energy  among  the  various  wave  lengths 
is  independent  of  the  form  and  size  of  the  space  and  of  the  nature 


ON  THE  SPECTRUM  OF  HYDROGEN  5 

of  the  surrounding  bodies  and  depends  only  on  the  temperature. 
Kirchhoff's  result  has  been  confirmed  by  experiment,  and  the 
amount  of  energy  and  its  distribution  among  the  various  wave 
lengths  and  the  manner  in  which  it  depends  on  the  tempe- 
rature are  now  fairly  well  known  from  a  great  amount  of  experi- 
mental work ;  or,  as  it  is  usually  expressed,  we  have  a  fairly 
accurate  experimental  knowledge  of  the  "laws  of  temperature 
radiation." 

Kirchhoff's  considerations  were  only  capable  of  predicting  the 
existence  of  a  law  of  temperature  radiation,  and  many  physicists 
have  subsequently  attempted  to  find  a  more  thorough  explanation 
of  the  experimental  results.  You  will  perceive  that  the  electro- 
magnetic theory  of  light  together  with  the  electron  theory  suggests 
a  method  of  solving  this  problem.  According  to  the  electron  theory 
of  matter  a  body  consists  of  a  system  of  electrons.  By  making 
certain  definite  assumptions  concerning  the  forces  acting  on  the 
electrons  it  is  possible  to  calculate  their  motion  and  consequently 
the  energy  radiated  from  the  body  per  second  in  the  form  of 
electromagnetic  oscillations  of  various  wave  lengths.  In  a  similar 
manner  the  absorption  of  rays  of  a  given  wave  length  by  a  substance 
can  be  determined  by  calculating  the  effect  of  electromagnetic 
oscillations  upon  the  motion  of  the  electrons.  Having  investigated 
the  emission  and  absorption  of  a  body  at  all  temperatures,  and  for 
rays  of  all  wave  lengths,  it  is  possible,  as  Kirchhoff  has  shown,  to 
determine  immediately  the  laws  of  temperature  radiation.  Since 
the  result  is  to  be  independent  of  the  nature  of  the  body  we  are 
justified  in  expecting  an  agreement  with  experiment,  even  though 
very  special  assumptions  are  made  about  the  forces  acting  upon 
the  electrons  of  the  hypothetical  substance.  This  naturally 
simplifies  the  problem  considerably,  but  it  is  nevertheless  suffi- 
ciently difficult  and  it  is  remarkable  that  it  has  been  possible 
to  make  any  advance  at  all  in  this  direction.  As  is  well  known 
this  has  been  done  by  Lorentz  (1903).  He  calculated  the 
emissive  as  well  as  the  absorptive  power  of  a  metal  for  long 
wave  lengths,  using  the  same  assumptions  about  the  motions 
of  the  electrons  in  the  metal  that  Drude  (1900)  employed  in 
his  calculation  of  the  ratio  of  the  electrical  and  thermal  conduc- 
tivities. Subsequently,  by  calculating  the  ratio  of  the  emissive 


6  ON  THE  SPECTRUM  OF  HYDROGEN 

to  the  absorptive  power,  Lorentz  really  obtained  an  expression 
for  the  law  of  temperature  radiation  which  for  long  wave  lengths 
agrees  remarkably  well  with  experimental  facts.  In  spite  of  this 
beautiful  and  promising  result,  it  has  nevertheless  become  apparent 
that  the  electromagnetic  theory  is  incapable  of  explaining  the  law 
of  temperature  radiation.  For,  it  is  possible  to  show,  that,  if  the 
investigation  is  not  confined  to  oscillations  of  long  wave  lengths, 
as  in  Lorentz's  work,  but  is  also  extended  to  oscillations  corre- 
sponding to  small  wave  lengths,  results  are  obtained  which  are 
contrary  to  experiment.  This  is  especially  evident  from  Jeans' 
investigations  (1905)  in  which  he  employed  a  very  interesting 
statistical  method  first  proposed  by  Lord  Rayleigh. 

We  are  therefore  compelled  to  assume,  that  the  classical  electro- 
dynamics does  not  agree  with  reality,  or  expressed  more  carefully, 
that  it  can  not  be  employed  in  calculating  the  absorption  and 
emission  of  radiation  by  atoms.  Fortunately,  the  law  of  temperature 
radiation  has  also  successfully  indicated  the  direction  in  which  the 
necessary  changes  in  the  electrodynamics  are  to  be  sought.  Even 
before  the  appearance  of  the  papers  by  Lorentz  and  Jeans,  Planck 
(1900)  had  derived  theoretically  a  formula  for  the  black  body  radia- 
tion which  was  in  good  agreement  with  the  results  of  experiment. 
Planck  did  not  limit  himself  exclusively  to  the  classical  electro- 
dynamics, but  introduced  the  further  assumption  that  a  system  of 
oscillating  electrical  particles  (elementary  resonators)  will  neither 
radiate  nor  absorb  energy  continuously,  as  required  by  the  ordinary 
electrodynamics,  but  on  the  contrary  will  radiate  and  absorb  dis- 
continuously.  The  energy  contained  within  the  system  at  any 
moment  is  always  equal  to  a  whole  multiple  of  the  so-called 
quantum  of  energy  the  magnitude  of  which  is  equal  to  hv,  where 
h  is  Planck's  constant  and  v  is  the  frequency  of  oscillation  of  the 
system  per  second.  In  formal  respects  Planck's  theory  leaves  much 
to  be  desired ;  in  certain  calculations  the  ordinary  electrodynamics 
is  used,  while  in  others  assumptions  distinctly  at  variance  with  it 
are  introduced  without  any  attempt  being  made  to  show  that  it 
is  possible  to  give  a  consistent  explanation  of  the  procedure  used. 
Planck's  theory  would  hardly  have  acquired  general  recognition 
merely  on  the  ground  of  its  agreement  with  experiments  on  black 
body  radiation,  but,  as  you  know,  the  theory  has  also  contributed 


ON  THE  SPECTRUM  OF  HYDROGEN  7 

quite  remarkably  to  the  elucidation  of  many  different  physical 
phenomena,  such  as  specific  heats,  photoelectric  effect,  X-rays  and 
the  absorption  of  heat  rays  by  gases.  These  explanations  involve 
more  than  the  qualitative  assumption  of  a  discontinuous  trans- 
formation of  energy,  for  with  the  aid  of  Planck's  constant  h  it 
seems  to  be  possible,  at  least  approximately,  to  account  for  a  great 
number  of  phenomena  about  which  nothing  could  be  said  previously. 
It  is  therefore  hardly  too  early  to  express  the  opinion  that,  whatever 
the  final  explanation  will  be,  the  discovery  of  "  energy  quanta " 
must  be  considered  as  one  of  the  most  important  results  arrived  at 
in  physics,  and  must  be  taken  into  consideration  in  investigations 
of  the  properties  of  atoms  and  particularly  in  connection  with  any 
explanation  of  the  spectral  laws  in  which  such  phenomena  as 
the  emission  and  absorption  of  electromagnetic  radiation  are 
concerned. 

The  nuclear  theory  of  the  atom.  We  shall  now  consider  the 
second  part  of  the  foundation  on  which  we  shall  build,  namely  the 
conclusions  arrived  at  from  experiments  with  the  rays  emitted  by 
radioactive  substances.  I  have  previously  here  in  the  Physical 
Society  had  the  opportunity  of  speaking  of  the  scattering  of  a  rays 
in  passing  through  thin  plates,  and  to  mention  how  Rutherford 
(1911)  has  proposed  a  theory  for  the  structure  of  the  atom  in 
order  to  explain  the  remarkable  and  unexpected  results  of  these 
experiments.  I  shall,  therefore,  only  remind  you  that  the  charac- 
teristic feature  of  Rutherford's  theory  is  the  assumption  of  the 
existence  of  a  positively  charged  nucleus  inside  the  atom.  A  number 
of  electrons  are  supposed  to  revolve  in  closed  orbits  around  the 
nucleus,  the  number  of  these  electrons  being  sufficient  to  neutralize 
the  positive  charge  of  the  nucleus.  The  dimensions  of  the  nucleus 
are  supposed  to  be  very  small  in  comparison  with  the  dimensions 
of  the  orbits  of  the  electrons,  and  almost  the  entire  mass  of  the 
atom  is  supposed  to  be  concentrated  in  the  nucleus. 

According  to  Rutherford's  calculation  the  positive  charge  of  the 
nucleus  corresponds  to  a  number  of  electrons  equal  to  about  half 
the  atomic  weight.  This  number  coincides  approximately  with  the 
number  of  the  particular  element  in  the  periodic  system  and  it  is 
therefore  natural  to  assume  that  the  number  of  electrons  in  the 


8  ON  THE  SPECTRUM  OF  HYDROGEN 

atom  is  exactly  equal  to  this  number.  This  hypothesis,  which  was 
first  stated  by  van  den  Broek  (1912),  opens  the  possibility  of 
obtaining  a  simple  explanation  of  the  periodic  system.  This  as- 
sumption is  strongly  confirmed  by  experiments  on  the  elements 
of  small  atomic  weight.  In  the  first  place,  it  is  evident  that  ac- 
cording to  Rutherford's  theory  the  a  particle  is  the  same  as  the 
nucleus  of  a  helium  atom.  Since  the  a  particle  has  a  double  positive 
charge  it  follows  immediately  that  a  neutral  helium  atom  contains 
two  electrons.  Further  the  concordant  results  obtained  from  cal- 
culations based  on  experiments  as  different  as  the  diffuse  scatter- 
ing of  X-rays  and  the  decrease  in  velocity  of  a  rays  in  passing 
through  matter  render  the  conclusion  extremely  likely  that  a 
hydrogen  atom  contains  only  a  single  electron.  This  agrees  most 
beautifully  with  the  fact  that  J.  J.  Thomson  in  his  well-known 
experiments  on  rays  of  positive  electricity  has  never  observed  a 
hydrogen  atom  with  more  than  a  single  positive  charge,  while  all 
other  elements  investigated  may  have  several  charges. 

Let  us  now  assume  that  a  hydrogen  atom  simply  consists  of  an 
electron  revolving  around  a  nucleus  of  equal  and  opposite  charge, 
and  of  a  mass  which  is  very  large  in  comparison  with  that  of  the 
electron.  It  is  evident  that  this  assumption  may  explain  the  peculiar 
position  already  referred  to  which  hydrogen  occupies  among  the 
elements,  but  it  appears  at  the  outset  completely  hopeless  to  attempt 
to  explain  anything  at  all  of  the  special  properties  of  hydrogen, 
still  less  its  line  spectrum,  on  the  basis  of  considerations  relating 
to  such  a  simple  system. 

Let  us  assume  for  the  sake  of  brevity  that  the  mass  of  the  nucleus 
is  infinitely  large  in  proportion  to  that  of  the  electron,  and  that  the 
velocity  of  the  electron  is  very  small  in  comparison  with  that  of 
light.  If  we  now  temporarily  disregard  the  energy  radiation,  which, 
according  to  the  ordinary  electrodynamics,  will  accompany  the  ac- 
celerated motion  of  the  electron,  the  latter  in  accordance  with 
Kepler's  first  law  will  describe  an  ellipse  with  the  nucleus  in  one 
of  the  foci.  Denoting  the  frequency  of  revolution  by  o>,  and  the 
major  axis  of  the  ellipse  by  2a  we  find  that 

2TF3  P* 


ON  THE  SPECTRUM  OF  HYDROGEN  9 

where  e  is  the  charge  of  the  electron  and  m  its  mass,  while  W  is 
the  work  which  must  be  added  to  the  system  in  order  to  remove 
the  electron  to  an  infinite  distance  from  the  nucleus. 

These  expressions  are  extremely  simple  and  they  show  that  the 
magnitude  of  the  frequency  of  revolution  as  well  as  the  length  of 
the  major  axis  depend  only  on  W,  and  are  independent  of  the 
excentricity  of  the  orbit.  By  varying  W  we  may  obtain  all  possible 
values  for  &>  and  2a.  This  condition  shows,  however,  that  it  is  not 
possible  to  employ  the  above  formulae  directly  in  calculating  the 
orbit  of  the  electron  in  a  hydrogen  atom.  For  this  it  will  be  necessary 
to  assume  that  the  orbit  of  the  electron  can  not  take  on  all  values, 
and  in  any  event,  the  line  spectrum  clearly  indicates  that  the 
oscillations  of  the  electron  cannot  vary  continuously  between  wide 
limits.  The  impossibility  of  making  any  progress  with  a  simple 
system  like  the  one  considered  here  might  have  been  foretold  from 
a  consideration  of  the  dimensions  involved ;  for  with  the  aid  of  e 
and  m  alone  it  is  impossible  to  obtain  a  quantity  which  can  be 
interpreted  as  a  diameter  of  an  atom  or  as  a  frequency. 

If  we  attempt  to  account  for  the  radiation  of  energy  in  the  manner 
required  by  the  ordinary  electrodynamics  it  will  only  make  matters 
worse.  As  a  result  of  the  radiation  of  energy  W  would  continually 
increase,  and  the  above  expressions  (4)  show  that  at  the  same  time 
the  frequency  of  revolution  of  the  system  would  increase,  and  the 
dimensions  of  the  orbit  decrease.  This  process  would  not  stop  until 
the  particles  had  approached  so  closely  to  one  another  that  they  no 
longer  attracted  each  other.  The  quantity  of  energy  which  would 
be  radiated  away  before  this  happened  would  be  very  great.  If  we 
were  to  treat  these  particles  as  geometrical  points  this  energy  would 
be  infinitely  great,  and  with  the  dimensions  of  the  electrons  as 
calculated  from  their  mass  (about  10~13  cm.),  and  of  the  nucleus  as 
calculated  by  Rutherford  (about  10~12  cm.),  this  energy  would  be 
many  times  greater  than  the  energy  changes  with  which  we  are 
familiar  in  ordinary  atomic  processes. 

It  can  be  seen  that  it  is  impossible  to  employ  Rutherford's  atomic 
model  so  long  as  we  confine  ourselves  exclusively  to  the  ordinary 
electrodynamics.  But  this  is  nothing  more  than  might  have  been 
expected.  As  I  have  mentioned  we  may  consider  it  to  be  an 
established  fact  that  it  is  impossible  to  obtain  a  satisfactory 


JO  ON  THE  SPECTRUM  OF  HYDROGEN 

explanation  of  the  experiments  on  temperature  radiation  with  the 
aid  of  electrodynamics,  no  matter  what  atomic  model  be  em- 
ployed. The  fact  that  the  deficiencies  of  the  atomic  model  we  are 
considering  stand  out  so  plainly  is  therefore  perhaps  no  serious 
drawback;  even  though  the  defects  of  other  atomic  models  are 
much  better  concealed  they  must  nevertheless  be  present  and  will 
be  just  as  serious. 

Quantum  theory  of  spectra.  Let  us  now  try  to  overcome  these 
difficulties  by  applying  Planck's  theory  to  the  problem. 

It  is  readily  seen  that  there  can  be  no  question  of  a  direct  appli- 
cation of  Planck's  theory.  This  theory  is  concerned  with  the  emission 
and  absorption  of  energy  in  a  system  of  electrical  particles,  which 
oscillate  with  a  given  frequency  per  second,  dependent  only  on  the 
nature  of  the  system  and  independent  of  the  amount  of  energy 
contained  in  the  system.  In  a  system  consisting  of  an  electron  and 
a  nucleus  the  period  of  oscillation  corresponds  to  the  period  of 
revolution  of  the  electron.  But  the  formula  (4)  for  <w  shows  that  the 
frequency  of  revolution  depends  upon  W,  i.e.  on  the  energy  of  the 
system.  Still  the  fact  that  we  can  not  immediately  apply  Planck's 
theory  to  our  problem  is  not  as  serious  as  it  might  seem  to  be,  for 
in  assuming  Planck's  theory  we  have  manifestly  acknowledged  the 
inadequacy  of  the  ordinary  electrodynamics  and  have  definitely 
parted  with  the  coherent  group  of  ideas  on  which  the  latter  theory 
is  based.  In  fact  in  taking  such  a  step  we  can  not  expect  that  all 
cases  of  disagreement  between  the  theoretical  conceptions  hitherto 
employed  and  experiment  will  be  removed  by  the  use  of  Planck's 
assumption  regarding  the  quantum  of  the  energy  momentarily 
present  in  an  oscillating  system.  We  stand  here  almost  entirely  on 
virgin  ground,  and  upon  introducing  new  assumptions  we  need  only 
take  care  not  to  get  into  contradiction  with  experiment.  Time  will 
have  to  show  to  what  extent  this  can  be  avoided ;  but  the  safest 
way  is,  of  course,  to  make  as  few  assumptions  as  possible. 

With  this  in  mind  let  us  first  examine  the  experiments  on 
temperature  radiation.  The  subject  of  direct  observation  is  the 
distribution  of  radiant  energy  over  oscillations  of  the  various  wave 
lengths.  Even  though  we  may  assume  that  this  energy  comes  from 
systems  of  oscillating  particles,  we  know  little  or  nothing  about 


ON  THE  SPECTRUM  OF  HYDROGEN  11 

these  systems.  No  one  has  ever  seen  a  Planck's  resonator,  nor 
indeed  even  measured  its  frequency  of  oscillation  ;  we  can  observe 
only  the  period  of  oscillation  of  the  radiation  which  is  emitted.  It 
is  therefore  very  convenient  that  it  is  possible  to  show  that  to 
obtain  the  laws  of  temperature  radiation  it  is  not  necessary  to 
make  any  assumptions  about  the  systems  which  emit  the  radiation 
except  that  the  amount  of  energy  emitted  each  time  shall  be  equal 
to  hv,  where  h  is  Planck's  constant  and  v  is  the  frequency  of  the 
radiation.  Indeed,  it  is  possible  to  derive  Planck's  law  of  radiation 
from  this  assumption  alone,  as  shown  by  Debye,  who  employed  a 
method  which  is  a  combination  of  that  of  Planck  and  of  Jeans. 
Before  considering  any  further  the  nature  of  the  oscillating  systems 
let  us  see  whether  it  is  possible  to  bring  this  assumption  about  the 
emission  of  radiation  into  agreement  with  the  spectral  laws. 

If  the  spectrum  of  some  element  contains  a  spectral  line  corre- 
sponding to  the  frequency  v  it  will  be  assumed  that  one  of  the 
atoms  of  the  element  (or  some  other  elementary  system)  can  emit 
an  amount  of  energy  hv.  Denoting,  the  energy  of  the  atom  before 
and  after  the  emission  of  the  radiation  by  El  and  Ea  we  have 


(5) 


During  the  emission  of  the  radiation  the  system  may  be  regarded 
as  passing  from  one  state  to  another  ;  in  order  to  introduce  a  name 
for  these  states,  we  shall  call  them  "stationary"  states,  simply 
indicating  thereby  that  they  form  some  kind  of  waiting  places 
between  which  occurs  the  emission  of  the  energy  corresponding  to 
the  various  spectral  lines.  As  previously  mentioned  the  spectrum 
of  an  element  consists  of  a  series  of  lines  whose  wave  lengths  may 
be  expressed  by  the  formula  (2).  By  comparing  this  expression 

with  the  relation  given  above  it  is  seen  that  —  since  v  =  -  ,  where  c 

A. 

is  the  velocity  of  light  —  each  of  the  spectral  lines  may  be  regarded 
as  being  emitted  by  the  transition  of  a  system  between  two  stationary 
states  in  which  the  energy  apart  from  an  additive  arbitrary 
constant  is  given  by  —  chFr  (na)  and  —  chFs  (n2)  respectively.  Using 
this  interpretation  the  combination  principle  asserts  that  a  series 
of  stationary  states  exists  for  the  given  system,  and  that  it  can 


12  ON  THE  SPECTRUM  OF  HYDROGEN 

pass  from  one  to  any  other  of  these  states  with  the  emission  of 
a  monochromatic  radiation.  We  see,  therefore,  that  with  a  simple 
extension  of  our  first  assumption  it  is  possible  to  give  a  formal 
explanation  of  the  most  general  law  of  line  spectra. 

Hydrogen  spectrum.  This  result  encourages  us  to  make  an 
attempt  to  obtain  a  clear  conception  of  the  stationary  states  which 
have  so  far  only  been  regarded  as  formal.  With  this  end  in  view, 
we  naturally  turn  to  the  spectrum  of  hydrogen.  The  formula 
applying  to  this  spectrum  is  given  by  the  expression 

i^R_R 

\     nf     nf 

According  to  our  assumption  this  spectrum  is  produced  by  tran- 
sitions between  a  series  of  stationary  states  of  a  system,  concerning 
which  we  can  for  the  present  only  say  that  the  energy  of  the  system 
in  the  nth  state,  apart  from  an  additive  constant,  is  given  by 

--  .    Let  us  now  try  to  find  a  connection  between  this  and  the 
ri*  J 

model  of  the  hydrogen  atom.  We  assume  that  in  the  calculation 
of  the  frequency  of  revolution  of  the  electron  in  the  stationary  states 
of  the  atom  it  will  be  possible  to  employ  the  above  formula  for  «. 
It  is  quite  natural  to  make  this  assumption  ;  since,  in  trying  to 
form  a  reasonable  conception  of  the  stationary  states,  there  is,  for 
the  present  at  least,  no  other  means  available  besides  the  ordinary 
mechanics. 

Corresponding  to  the  nth  stationary  state  in  formula  (4)  for  to, 

let  us  by  way  of  experiment  put  W  =  —  ^  .   This  gives  us 


The  radiation  of  light  corresponding  to  a  particular  spectral  line 
is  according  to  our  assumption  emitted  by  a  transition  between 
two  stationary  states,  corresponding  to  two  different  frequencies  of 
revolution,  and  we  are  not  justified  in  expecting  any  simple  re- 
lation between  these  frequencies  of  revolution  of  the  electron  and 
the  frequency  of  the  emitted  radiation.  You  understand,  of  course, 
that  I  am  by  no  means  trying  to  give  what  might  ordinarily  be 
described  as  an  explanation;  nothing  has  been  said  here  about 


ON  THE  SPECTRUM  OF  HYDROGEN  13 

how  or  why  the  radiation  is  emitted.  On  one  point,  however,  we 
may  expect  a  connection  with  the  ordinary  conceptions  ;  namely. 
that  it  will  be  possible  to  calculate  the  emission  of  slow  electro- 
magnetic oscillations  on  the  basis  of  the  classical  electrodynamics. 
This  assumption  is  very  strongly  supported  by  the  result  of 
Lorentz's  calculations  which  have  already  been  described.  From 
the  formula  for  a>  it  is  seen  that  the  frequency  of  revolution  de- 

creases as  n  increases,  and  that  the  expression  —  —  approaches  the 

™n+i 

value  1. 

According  to  what  has  been  said  above,  the  frequency  of  the 
radiation  corresponding  to  the  transition  between  the  (n  +  l)th 
and  the  nth  stationary  state  is  given  by 

v  =  Re  I  —  — 


. 
*     (n  + 

If  n  is  very  large  this  expression  is  approximately  equal  to 

v  =  2Rc(n3. 

In  order  to  obtain  a  connection  with  the  ordinary  electrodynamics 
let  us  now  place  this  frequency  equal  to  the  frequency  of  revolu- 
tion, that  is 

wn  =  2Rc/n3. 

Introducing  this  value  of  &>„  in  (6)  we  see  that  n  disappears  from 
the  equation,  and  further  that  the  equation  will  be  satisfied  only  if 


The  constant  R  is  very  accurately  known,  and  is,  as  I  have  said 
before,  equal  to  109675.  By  introducing  the  most  recent  values 
for  e,  m  and  h  the  expression  on  the  right-hand  side  of  the  equa- 
tion becomes  equal  to  1'09  .  10*.  The  agreement  is  as  good  as 
could  be  expected,  considering  the  uncertainty  in  the  experimental 
determination  of  the  constants  e,  m  and  h.  The  agreement  between 
our  calculations  and  the  classical  electrodynamics  is,  therefore, 
fully  as  good  as  we  are  justified  in  expecting. 

We  can  not  expect  to  obtain  a  corresponding  explanation  of  the 
frequency  values  of  the  other  stationary  states.  Certain  simple 
formal  relations  apply,  however,  to  all  the  stationary  ^tates.  By 
introducing  the  expression,  which  has  been  found  for  R,  we 
get  for  the  wth  state  Wn  =  %nha)n.  This  equation  is  entirely 


14  ON  THE  SPECTRUM  OF  HYDROGEN 

analogous  to  Planck's  assumption  concerning  the  energy  of  a 
resonator.  W  in  our  system  is  readily  shown  to  be  equal  to  the 
average  value  of  the  kinetic  energy  of  the  electron  during  a 
single  revolution.  The  energy  of  a  resonator  was  shown  by  Planck 
you  may  remember  to  be  always  equal  to  nhv.  Further  the  average 
value  of  the  kinetic  energy  of  Planck's  resonator  is  equal  to  its 
potential  energy,  so  that  the  average  value  of  the  kinetic  energy 
of  the  resonator,  according  to  Planck,  is  equal  to  %nhco.  This 
analogy  suggests  another  manner  of  presenting  the  theory,  and  it 
was  just  in  this  way  that  I  was  originally  led  into  these  con- 
siderations. When  we  consider  how  differently  the  equation  is 
employed  here  and  in  Planck's  theory  it  appears  to  me  misleading 
to  use  this  analogy  as  a  foundation,  and  in  the  account  I  have 
given  I  have  tried  to  free  myself  as  much  as  possible  from  it. 

Let  us  continue  with  the  elucidation  of  the  calculations,  and  in 
the  expression  for  2a  introduce  the  value  of  If  which  corresponds 
to  the  nth  stationary  state.  This  gives  us 

2a  =  w2  .  -^3  =  n2  .  ^—,  t  =  w2  .  1  1  .  10~8.         .  .  .(8) 
ckR  22 


It  is  seen  that  for  small  values  of  n,  we  obtain  values  for  the 
major  axis  of  the  orbit  of  the  electron  which  are  of  the  same 
order  of  magnitude  as  the  values  of  the  diameters  of  the  atoms 
calculated  from  the  kinetic  theory  of  gases.  For  large  values  of 
n,  2a  becomes  very  large  in  proportion  to  the  calculated  dimensions 
of  the  atoms.  This,  however,  does  not  necessarily  disagree  with 
experiment.  Under  ordinary  circumstances  a  hydrogen  atom  will 
probably  exist  only  in  the  state  corresponding  to  n  =  1.  For  this 
state  W  will  have  its  greatest  value  and,  consequently,  the  atom 
will  have  emitted  the  largest  amount  of  energy  possible  ;  this  will 
therefore  represent  the  most  stable  state  of  the  atom  from  which 
the  system  can  not  be  transferred  except  by  adding  energy  to  it 
from  without.  The  large  values  for  2a  corresponding  to  large  n  need 
not,  therefore,  be  contrary  to  experiment  ;  indeed,  we  may  in  these 
large  values  seek  an  explanation  of  the  fact,  that  in  the  laboratory 
it  has  hitherto  not  been  possible  to  observe  the  hydrogen  lines 
corresponding  to  large  values  of  n  in  Balmer's  formula,  while  they 
have  been  observed  in  the  spectra  of  certain  stars.  In  order  that 
the  large  orbits  of  the  electrons  may  not  be  disturbed  by  electrical 


ON  THE  SPECTRUM  OF  HYDROGEN  15 

forces  from  the  neighbouring  atoms  the  pressure  will  have  to  be 
very  low,  so  low,  indeed,  that  it  is  impossible  to  obtain  sufficient 
light  from  a  Geissler  tube  of  ordinary  dimensions.  In  the  stars, 
however,  we  may  assume  that  we  have  to  do  with  hydrogen  which 
is  exceedingly  attenuated  and  distributed  throughout  an  enor- 
mously large  region  of  space. 

The  Pickering  lines.  You  have  probably  noticed  that  we  have 
not  mentioned  at  all  the  spectrum  found  in  certain  stars  which 
according  to  the  opinion  then  current  was  assigned  to  hydrogen, 
and  together  with  the  ordinary  hydrogen  spectrum  was  considered 
by  Rydberg  to  form  a  connected  system  of  lines  completely 
analogous  to  the  spectra  of  other  elements.  You  have  probably 
also  perceived  that  difficulties  would  arise  in  interpreting  this 
spectrum  by  means  of  the  assumptions  which  have  been  employed. 
If  such  an  attempt  were  to  be  made  it  would  be  necessary  to  give 
up  the  simple  considerations  which  lead  to  the  expression  (7)  for 
the  constant  R.  We  shall  see,  however,  that  it  appears  possible  to 
explain  the  occurrence  of  this  spectrum  in  another  way.  Let  us 
suppose  that  it  is  not  due  to  hydrogen,  but  to  some  other  simple 
system  consisting  of  a  single  electron  revolving  about  a  nucleus 
with  an  electrical  charge  Ne.  The  expression  for  to  becomes  then 

2      W* 


Repeating  the  same  calculations  as  before  only  in  the  inverse 
order  we  find,  that  this  system  will  emit  a  line  spectrum  given  by 
the  expression 


I 

By  comparing  this  formula  with  the  formula  for  Pickering's  and 
Rydberg's  series,  we  see  that  the  observed  lines  can  be  explained 
on  the  basis  of  the  theory,  if  it  be  assumed  that  the  spectrum  is 
due  to  an  electron  revolving  about  a  nucleus  with  a  charge  20,  or 
according  to  Rutherford's  theory  around  the  nucleus  of  a  helium 
atom.  The  fact  that  the  spectrum  in  question  is  not  observed  in 
an  ordinary  helium  tube,  but  only  in  stars,  may  be  accounted  for 


16  ON  THE  SPECTRUM  OF  HYDROGEN 

by  the  high  degree  of  ionization  which  is  required  for  the  produc- 
tion of  this  spectrum ;  a  neutral  helium  atom  contains  of  course 
two  electrons  while  the  system  under  consideration  contains 
only  one. 

These  conclusions  appear  to  be  supported  by  experiment. 
Fowler,  as  I  have  mentioned,  has  recently  succeeded  in  observing 
Pickering's  and  Rydberg's  lines  in  a  laboratory  experiment.  By 
passing  a  very  heavy  current  through  a  mixture  of  hydrogen  and 
helium  Fowler  observed  not  only  these  lines  but  also  a  new  series 
of  lines.  This  new  series  was  of  the  same  general  type,  the  wave 
length  being  given  approximately  by 


Fowler  interpreted  all  the  observed  lines  as  the  hydrogen  spectrum 
sought  for.  With  the  observation  of  the  latter  series  of  lines, 
however,  the  basis  of  the  analogy  between  the  hypothetical 
hydrogen  spectrum  and  the  other  spectra  disappeared,  and  thereby 
also  the  foundation  upon  which  Rydberg  had  founded  his  conclu- 
sions ;  on  the  contrary  it  is  seen,  that  the  occurrence  of  the  lines 
was  exactly  what  was  to  be  expected  on  our  view. 

In  the  following  table  the  first  column  contains  the  wave 
lengths  measured  by  Fowler,  while  the  second  contains  the  limiting 
values  of  the  experimental  errors  given  by  him ;  in  the  third 
column  we  find  the  products  of  the  wave  lengths  by  the  quantity 

(  — -)  1010;  the  values  employed  for  n^  and  HZ  are  enclosed  in 

\n1      n%  I 

parentheses  in  the  last  column. 

X .  108  Limit  of  error      X  .  (^  -  -^  .  1010 

4685-98  0-01  22779'!  (3:4) 

3203-30  0-05  22779'0  (3:5) 

2733-34  0-05  22777'8  (3:6) 

2511-31  0-05  22778-3  (3:7) 

2385-47  0-05  22777'9  (3:8) 

2306-20  0-10  22777'3  (3:9) 

2252-88  O'lO  22779'!  (3:10) 

5410-5  1-0  22774  (4:7) 

4541-3  0-25  22777  (4:9) 

4200-3  0-5  22781  (4:11) 


ON  THE  SPECTRUM  OF  HYDROGEN  17 

The  values  of  the  products  are  seen  to  be  very  nearly  equal, 
while  the  deviations  are  of  the  same  order  of  magnitude  as  the 
limits  of  experimental  error.  The  value  of  the  product 


should  for  this  spectrum,  according  to  the  formula  (9),  be  exactly 
^  of  the  corresponding  product  for  the  hydrogen  spectrum.  From 
the  tables  on  pages  1  and  16  we  find  for  these  products  91153 
and  22779,  and  dividing  the  former  by  the  latter  we  get  4'0016. 
This  value  is  very  nearly  equal  to  4;  the  deviation  is,  however, 
much  greater  than  can  be  accounted  for  in  any  way  by  the  errors 
of  the  experiments.  It  has  been  easy,  however,  to  find  a  theo- 
retical explanation  of  this  point.  In  all  the  foregoing  calculations 
we  have  assumed  that  the  mass  of  the  nucleus  is  infinitely  great 
compared  to  that  of  the  electron.  This  is  of  course  not  the 
case,  even  though  it  holds  to  a  very  close  approximation;  for  a 
hydrogen  atom  the  ratio  of  the  mass  of  the  nucleus  to  that  of  the 
electron  will  be  about  1850  and  for  a  helium  atom  four  times  as 
great. 

If  we  consider  a  system  consisting  of  an  electron  revolving  about. 
a  nucleus  with  a  charge  Ne  and  a  mass  M,  we  find  the  following 
expression  for  the  frequency  of  revolution  of  the  system  : 
a_2    W3(M+m) 
~7r2     NWMm 

From  this  formula  we  find  in  a  manner  quite  similar  to  that 
previously  employed  that  the  system  will  emit  a  line  spectrum, 
the  wave  lengths  of  which  are  given  by  the  formula 

1\ 


If  with  the  aid  of  this  formula  we  try  to  find  the  ratio  of  the 
product  for  the  hydrogen  spectrum  to  that  of  the  hypothetical 
helium  spectrum  we  get  the  value  4'00163  which  is  in  complete 
agreement  with  the  preceding  value  calculated  from  the  experi- 
mental observations. 

I  must  further  mention  that  Evans  has  made  some  experiments 
to  determine  whether  the  spectrum  in  question  is  due  to  hydrogen 
or  helium.  He  succeeded  in  observing  one  of  the  lines  in  very 

B.  2 


18  ON  THE  SPECTRUM  OF  HYDROGEN 

pure  helium  ;  there  was,  at  any  rate,  not  enough  hydrogen  present 
to  enable  the  hydrogen  lines  to  be  observed.  Since  in  any  event 
Fowler  does  not  seem  to  consider  such  evidence  as  conclusive  it  is 
to  be  hoped  that  these  experiments  will  be  continued.  There  is, 
however,  also  another  possibility  of  deciding  this  question.  As  is 
evident  from  the  formula  (10),  the  helium  spectrum  under  con- 
sideration should  contain,  besides  the  lines  observed  by  Fowler,  a 
series  of  lines  lying  close  to  the  ordinary  hydrogen  lines.  These 
lines  may  be  obtained  by  putting  %  =  4>,  nz  =  6,  8,  10,  etc.  Even 
if  these  lines  were  present,  it  would  be  extremely  difficult  to 
observe  them  on  account  of  their  position  with  regard  to  the 
hydrogen  lines,  but  should  they  be  observed  this  would  probably 
also  settle  the  question  of  the  origin  of  the  spectrum,  since  no 
reason  would  seem  to  be  left  to  assume  the  spectrum  to  be  due  to 
hydrogen. 

Other  spectra.  For  the  spectra  of  other  elements  the  problem 
becomes  more  complicated,  since  the  atoms  contain  a  larger 
number  of  electrons.  It  has  not  yet  been  possible  on  the  basis  of 
this  theory  to  explain  any  other  spectra  besides  those  which  I 
have  already  mentioned.  On  the  other  hand  it  ought  to  be 
mentioned  that  the  general  laws  applying  to  the  spectra  are  very 
simply  interpreted  on  the  basis  of  our  assumptions.  So  far  as  the 
combination  principle  is  concerned  its  explanation  is  obvious.  In 
the  method  we  have  employed  our  point  of  departure  was  largely 
determined  by  this  particular  principle.  But  a  simple  explanation 
can  be  also  given  of  the  other  general  law,  namely,  the  occurrence 
of  Rydberg's  constant  in  all  spectral  formulae.  Let  us  assume 
that  the  spectra  under  consideration,  like  the  spectrum  of  hydrogen, 
are  emitted  by  a  neutral  system,  and  that  they  are  produced  by 
the  binding  of  an  electron  previously  removed  from  the  system. 
If  such  an  electron  revolves  about  the  nucleus  in  an  orbit  which 
is  large  in  proportion  to  that  of  the  other  electrons  it  will  be 
subjected  to  forces  much  the  same  as  the  electron  in  a  hydrogen 
atom,  since  the  inner  electrons  individually  will  approximately 
neutralize  the  effect  of  a  part  of  the  positive  charge  of  the  nucleus. 
We  may  therefore  assume  that  for  this  system  there  will  exist  a 
series  of  stationary  states  in  which  the  motion  of  the  outermost 


ON  THE  SPECTRUM  OF  HYDROGEN  19 

electron  is  approximately  the  same  as  in  the  stationary  states  of  a 
hydrogen  atom.  I  shall  not  discuss  these  matters  any  further, 
but  shall  only  mention  that  they  lead  to  the  conclusion  that 
Rydberg's  constant  is  not  exactly  the  same  for  all  elements. 
The  expression  for  this  constant  will  in  fact  contain  the  factor 

-^17 ,  where  M  is  the  mass  of  the  nucleus.    The  correction  is 

M  +  m 

exceedingly  small  for  elements  of  large  atomic  weight,  but  for 
hydrogen  it  is,  from  the  point  of  view  of  spectrum  analysis,  very 
considerable.  If  the  procedure  employed  leads  to  correct  results,  it 
is  not  therefore  permissible  to  calculate  Rydberg's  constant  directly 
from  the  hydrogen  spectrum ;  the  value  of  the  universal  constant 
should  according  to  the  theory  be  109735  and  not  109675. 

I  shall  not  tire  you  any  further  with  more  details ;  I  hope  to 
return  to  these  questions  here  in  the  Physical  Society,  and  to 
show  how,  on  the  basis  of  the  underlying  ideas,  it  is  possible 
to  develop  a  theory  for  the  structure  of  atoms  and  molecules. 
Before  closing  I  only  wish  to  say  that  I  hope  I  have  expressed 
myself  sufficiently  clearly  so  that  you  have  appreciated  the  extent 
to  which  these  considerations  conflict  with  the  admirably  coherent 
group  of  conceptions  which  have  been  rightly  termed  the  classical 
theory  of  electrodynamics.  On  the  other  hand,  by  emphasizing 
this  conflict,  I  have  tried  to  convey  to  you  the  impression  that  it 
may  be  also  possible  in  the  course  of  time  to  discover  a  certain 
coherence  in  the  new  ideas. 


3— 2 


ESSAY  II* 

ON  THE  SERIES  SPECTRA  OF  THE  ELEMENTS 

I.    INTRODUCTION 

The  subject  on  which  I  have  the  honour  to  speak  here,  at  the 
kind  invitation  of  the  Council  of  your  society,  is  very  extensive  and 
it  would  be  impossible  in  a  single  address  to  give  a  comprehensive 
survey  of  even  the  most  important  results  obtained  in  the  theory 
of  spectra.  In  what  follows  I  shall  try  merely  to  emphasize  some 
points  of  view  which  seem  to  me  important  when  considering  the 
present  state  of  the  theory  of  spectra  and  the  possibilities  of  its 
development  in  the  near  future.  I  regret  in  this  connection  not  to 
have  time  to  describe  the  history  of  the  development  of  spectral 
theories,  although  this  would  be  of  interest  for  our  purpose.  No 
difficulty,  however,  in  understanding  this  lecture  need  be  experienced 
on  this  account,  since  the  points  of  view  underlying  previous 
attempts  to  explain  the  spectra  differ  fundamentally  from  those  upon 
which  the  following  considerations  rest.  This  difference  exists  both 
in  the  development  of  our  ideas  about  the  structure  of  the  atom 
and  in  the  manner  in  which  these  ideas  are  used  in  explaining  the 
spectra. 

We  shall  assume,  according  to  Rutherford's  theory,  that  an  atom 
consists  of  a  positively  charged  nucleus  with  a  number  of  electrons 
revolving  about  it.  Although  the  nucleus  is  assumed  to  be  very 
small  in  proportion  to  the  size  of  the  whole  atom,  it  will  contain 
nearly  the  entire  mass  of  the  atom.  I  shall  not  state  the  reasons 
which  led  to  the  establishment  of  this  nuclear  theory  of  the  atom, 
nor  describe  the  very  strong  support  which  this  theory  has  received 
from  very  different  sources.  I  shall  mention  only  that  result 
which  lends  such  charm  and  simplicity  to  the  modern  development 
of  the  atomic  theory.  I  refer  to  the  idea  that  the  number  of  elec- 
trons in  a  neutral  atom  is  exactly  equal  to  the  number,  giving  the 
position  of  the  element  in  the  periodic  table,  the  so-called  "atomic 
number."  This  assumption,  which  was  first  proposed  by  van  den 
Broek,  immediately  suggests  the  possibility  ultimately  of  deriving 
*  Address  delivered  before  the  Physical  Society  in  Berlin,  April  27,  1920. 


ON  THE  SERIES  SPECTRA  OF  THE  ELEMENTS  21 

the  explanation  of  the  physical  and  chemical  properties  of  the 
elements  from  their  atomic  numbers.  If,  however,  an  explanation 
of  this  kind  is  attempted  on  the  basis  of  the  classical  laws  of 
mechanics  and  electrodynamics,  insurmountable  difficulties  are  en- 
countered. These  difficulties  become  especially  apparent  when  we 
consider  the  spectra  of  the  elements.  In  fact,  the  difficulties  are 
here  so  obvious  that  it  would  be  a  waste  of  time  to  discuss  them  in 
detail.  It  is  evident  that  systems  like  the  nuclear  atom,  if  based 
upon  the  usual  mechanical  and  electrodynamical  conceptions, 
would  not  even  possess  sufficient  stability  to  give  a  spectrum  con- 
sisting of  sharp  lines. 

In  this  lecture  I  shall  use  the  ideas  of  the  quantum  theory.  It 
will  not  be  necessary,  particularly  here  in  Berlin,  to  consider  in 
detail  how  Planck's  fundamental  work  on  temperature  radiation 
has  given  rise  to  this  theory,  according  to  which  the  laws  governing 
atomic  processes  exhibit  a  definite  element  of  discontinuity.  I  shall 
mention  only  Planck's  chief  result  about  the  properties  of  an  ex- 
ceedingly simple  kind  of  atomic  system,  the  Planck  "oscillator." 
This  consists  of  an  electrically  charged  particle  which  can  execute 
harmonic  oscillations  about  its  position  of  equilibrium  with  a  fre- 
quency independent  of  the  amplitude.  By  studying  the  statistical 
equilibrium  of  a  number  of  such  systems  in  a  field  of  radiation 
Planck  was  led  to  the  conclusion  that  the  emission  and  absorption 
of  radiation  take  place  in  such  a  manner,  that  so  far  as  a  statistical 
equilibrium  is  concerned  only  certain  distinctive  states  of  the 
oscillator  are  to  be  taken  into  consideration.  In  these  states  the 
energy  of  the  system  is  equal  to  a  whole  multiple  of  a  so-called 
"energy  quantum,"  which  was  found  to  be  proportional  to  the  fre- 
quency of  the  oscillator.  The  particular  energy  values  are  therefore 
given  by  the  well-known  formula 

En  =  nha>,   (1) 

where  n  is  a  whole  number,  a>  the  frequency  of  vibration  of  the 
oscillator,  and  h  is  Planck's  constant. 

If  we  attempt  to  use  this  result  to  explain  the  spectra  of  the 
elements,  however,  we  encounter  difficulties,  because  the  motion  of 
the  particles  in  the  atom,  in  spite  of  its  simple  structure,  is  in  general 
exceedingly  complicated  compared  with  the  motion  of  a  Planck 


22  ON  THE  SERIES  SPECTRA  OF  THE  ELEMENTS 

oscillator.  The  question  then  arises,  how  Planck's  result  ought  to 
be  generalized  in  order  to  make  its  application  possible.  Different 
points  of  view  immediately  suggest  themselves.  Thus  we  might 
regard  this  equation  as  a  relation  expressing  certain  characteristic 
properties  of  the  distinctive  motions  of  an  atomic  system  and  try 
to  obtain  the  general  form  of  these  properties.  On  the  other  hand, 
we  may  also  regard  equation  (1)  as  a  statement  about  a  property 
of  the  process  of  radiation  and  inquire  into  the  general  laws  which 
control  this  process. 

In  Planck's  theory  it  is  taken  for  granted  that  the  frequency  of 
the  radiation  emitted  and  absorbed  by  the  oscillator  is  equal  to  its 
own  frequency,  an  assumption  which  may  be  written 


•(2) 


if  in  order  to  make  a  sharp  distinction  between  the  frequency  of 
the  emitted  radiation  and  the  frequency  of  the  particles  in  the  atoms, 
we  here  and  in  the  following  denote  the  former  by  v  and  the  latter 
by  o>.  We  see,  therefore,  that  Planck's  result  may  be  interpreted  to 
mean,  that  the  oscillator  can  emit  and  absorb  radiation  only  in 
"radiation  quanta"  of  magnitude 


(3) 


It  is  well  known  that  ideas  of  this  kind  led  Einstein  to  a  theory 
of  the  photoelectric  effect.  This  is  of  great  importance,  since  it 
represents  the  first  instance  in  which  the  quantum  theory  was 
applied  to  a  phenomenon  of  non-statistical  character.  I  shall  not 
here  discuss  the  familiar  difficulties  to  which  the  "hypothesis  of 
light  quanta"  leads  in  connection  with  the  phenomena  of  inter- 
ference, for  the  explanation  of  which  the  classical  theory  of  radiation 
has  shown  itself  to  be  so  remarkably  suited.  Above  all  I  shall  not 
consider  the  problem  of  the  nature  of  radiation,  I  shall  only  attempt 
to  show  how  it  has  been  possible  in  a  purely  formal  manner  to 
develop  a  spectral  theory,  the  essential  elements  of  which  may  be 
considered  as  a  simultaneous  rational  development  of  the  two  wavs 
of  interpreting  Planck's  result. 


ON  THE  SERIES  SPECTRA  OF  THE  ELEMENTS  23 


II.    GENERAL  PRINCIPLES  OF  THE  QUANTUM  THEORY 
OF  SPECTRA 

In  order  to  explain  the  appearance  of  line  spectra  we  are  com- 
pelled to  assume  that  the  emission  of  radiation  by  an  atomic  system 
takes  place  in  such  a  manner  that  it  is  not  possible  to  follow  the 
emission  in  detail  by  means  of  the  usual  conceptions.  Indeed,  these 
do  not  even  offer  us  the  means  of  calculating  the  frequency  of  the 
emitted  radiation.  We  shall  see,  however,  that  it  is  possible  to  give 
a  very  simple  explanation  of  the  general  empirical  laws  for  the 
frequencies  of  the  spectral  lines,  if  for  each  emission  of  radiation 
by  the  atom  we  assume  the  fundamental  law  to  hold,  that  during 
the  entire  period  of  the  emission  the  radiation  possesses  one  and 
the  same  frequency  v,  connected  with  the  total  energy  emitted  by 
the  frequency  relation 

hv  =  E'-E" (4) 

Here  E'  and  E"  represent  the  energy  of  the  system  before  and 
after  the  emission. 

If  this  law  is  assumed,  the  spectra  do  not  give  us  information 
about  the  motion  of  the  particles  in  the  atom,  as  is  supposed  in  the 
usual  theory  of  radiation,  but  only  a  knowledge  of  the  energy 
changes  in  the  various  processes  which  can  occur  in  the  atom. 
From  this  point  of  view  the  spectra  show  the  existence  of  certain 
definite  energy  values  corresponding  to  certain  distinctive  states 
of  the  atoms.  These  states  will  be  called  the  stationary  states  of 
the  atoms,  since  we  shall  assume  that  the  atom  can  remain  a  finite 
time  in  each  state,  and  can  leave  this  state  only  by  a  process  of 
transition  to  another  stationary  state.  Notwithstanding  the  funda- 
mental departure  from  the  ordinary  mechanical  and  electrodynamical 
conceptions,  we  shall  see,  however,  that  it  is  possible  to  give  a 
rational  interpretation  of  the  evidence  provided  by  the  spectra  on 
the  basis  of  these  ideas. 

Although  we  must  assume  that  the  ordinary  mechanics  can  not 
be  used  to  describe  the  transitions  between  the  stationary  states, 
nevertheless,  it  has  been  found  possible  to  develop  a  consistent 
theory  on  the  assumption  that  the  motion  in  these  states  can  be 
described  by  the  use  of  the  ordinary  mechanics.  Moreover,  although 
the  process  of  radiation  can  not  be  described  on  the  basis  of  the 


24  ON  THE  SERIES  SPECTRA  OF  THE  ELEMENTS 

ordinary  theory  of  electrodynamics,  according  to  which  the  nature 
of  the  radiation  emitted  by  an  atom  is  directly  related  to  the  har- 
monic components  occurring  in  the  motion  of  the  system,  there  is 
found,  nevertheless,  to  exist  a  far-reaching  correspondence  between 
the  various  types  of  possible  transitions  between  the  stationary 
states  on  the  one  hand  and  the  various  harmonic  components  of  the 
motion  on  the  other  hand.  This  correspondence  is  of  such  a  nature, 
that  the  present  theory  of  spectra  is  in  a  certain  sense  to  be  regarded 
as  a  rational  generalization  of  the  ordinary  theory  of  radiation. 

Hydrogen  spectrum.  In  order  that  the  principal  points  may 
stand  out  as  clearly  as  possible  I  shall,  before  considering  the  more 
complicated  types  of  series  spectra,  first  consider  the  simplest  spec- 
trum, namely,  the  series  spectrum  of  hydrogen.  This  spectrum 
consists  of  a  number  of  lines  whose  frequencies  are  given  with  great 
exactness  by  Balmer's  formula 

K        K 
~(n'J      (n'r  " 

where  K  is  a  constant,  and  ri  and  n"  are  whole  numbers.  If  we  put 
n"  =*  2  and  give  to  n'  the  values  3,  4,  etc.,  we  get  the  well-known 
Balmer  series  of  hydrogen.  If  we  put  n"  =  1  or  n"  =  3  we  obtain 
respectively  the  ultra-violet  and  infra-red  series.  We  shall  assume 
the  hydrogen  atom  simply  to  consist  of  a  positively  charged  nucleus 
with  a  single  electron  revolving  about  it.  For  the  sake  of  simplicity 
we  shall  suppose  the  mass  of  the  nucleus  to  be  infinite  in  comparison 
with  the  mass  of  the  electron,  and  further  we  shall  disregard  the 
small  variations  in  the  motion  due  to  the  change  in  mass  of  the 
electron  with  its  velocity.  With  these  simplifications  the  electron 
will  describe  a  closed  elliptical  orbit  with  the  nucleus  at  one  of  the 
foci  The  frequency  of  revolution  w  and  the  major  axis  2a  of  the 
orbit  will  be  connected  with  the  energy  of  the  system  by  the  fol- 
lowing equations: 


Here  e  is  the  charge  of  the  electron  and  m  its  mass,  while  W  is  the 
work  required  to  remove  the  electron  to  infinity. 

The  simplicity  of  these  formulae  suggests  the  possibility  of  using 
them  in  an  attempt  to  explain  the  spectrum  of  hydrogen.   This, 


ON  THE  SERIES  SPECTRA  OF  THE  ELEMENTS  25 

however,  is  not  possible  so  long  as  we  use  the  classical  theory  of 
radiation.  It  would  not  even  be  possible  to  understand  how  hydrogen 
could  emit  a  spectrum  consisting  of  sharp  lines;  for  since  co  varies 
with  W,  the  frequency  of  the  emitted  radiation  would  vary  con- 
tinuously during  the  emission.  We  can  avoid  these  difficulties  if 
we  use  the  ideas  of  the  quantum  theory.  If  for  each  line  we  form 
the  product  hv  by  multiplying  both  sides  of  (5)  by  h,  then,  since 
the  right-hand  side  of  the  resulting  relation  may  be  written  as 
the  difference  of  two  simple  expressions,  we  are  led  by  comparison 
with  formula  (4)  to  the  assumption  that  the  separate  lines  of  the 
spectrum  will  be  emitted  by  transitions  between  two  stationary 
states,  forming  members  of  an  infinite  series  of  states,  in  which  the 
energy  in  the  nth  state  apart  from  an  arbitrary  additive  constant  is 
determined  by  the  expression 


The  negative  sign  has  been  chosen  because  the  energy  of  the  atom 
will  be  most  simply  characterized  by  the  work  W  required  to  remove 

the  electron  completely  from  the  atom.   If  we  now  substitute  — 

for  W  in  formula  (6),  we  obtain  the  following  expression  for  the  fre- 
quency and  the  major  axis  in  the  nth  stationary  state: 


A  comparison  between  the  motions  determined  by  these  equations 
and  the  distinctive  states  of  a  Planck  resonator  may  be  shown  to 
offer  a  theoretical  determination  of  the  constant  K.  Instead  of 
doing  this  I  shall  show  how  the  value  of  K  can  be  found  by  a  simple 
comparison  of  the  spectrum  emitted  with  the  motion  in  the  stationary 
states,  a  comparison  which  at  the  same  time  will  lead  us  to  the 
principle  of  correspondence. 

We  have  assumed  that  each  hydrogen  line  is  the  result  of  a 
transition  between  two  stationary  states  of  the  atom  corresponding 
to  different  values  of  n.  Equations  (8)  show  that  the  frequency  of 
revolution  and  the  major  axis  of  the  orbit  can  be  entirely  different 
in  the  two  states,  since,  as  the  energy  decreases,  the  major  axis  of 
the  orbit  becomes  smaller  and  the  frequency  of  revolution  increases. 


26  ON  THE  SERIES  SPECTRA  OF  THE  ELEMENTS 

In  general,  therefore,  it  will  be  impossible  to  obtain  a  relation  be- 
tween the  frequency  of  revolution  of  the  electrons  and  the  frequency 
of  the  radiation  as  in  the  ordinary  theory  of  radiation.  If,  however, 
we  consider  the  ratio  of  the  frequencies  of  revolution  in  two  stationary 
states  corresponding  to  given  values  of  ri  and  n",  we  see  that  this 
ratio  approaches  unity  as  n'  and  n"  gradually  increase,  if  at  the 
same  time  the  difference  n  —  n"  remains  unchanged.  By  consider- 
ing transitions  corresponding  to  large  values  of  n'  and  n"  we  may 
therefore  hope  to  establish  a  certain  connection  with  the  ordinary 
theory.  For  the  frequency  of  the  radiation  emitted  by  a  transition, 
we  get  according  to  (5) 

K  K  >         "  n'+n" 


If  now  the  numbers  n'  and  ri'  are  large  in  proportion  to  their  differ- 
ence, we  see  that  by  equations  (8)  this  expression  may  be  written 
approximately, 


where  &>  represents  the  frequency  of  revolution  in  the  one  or  the 
other  of  the  two  stationary  states.  Since  n'  —  n"  is  a  whole  number, 
we  see  that  the  first  part  of  this  expression,  i.e.  (n  —  n")  &>,  is  the 
same  as  the  frequency  of  one  of  the  harmonic  components  into 
which  the  elliptical  motion  may  be  decomposed.  This  involves  the 
well-known  result  that  for  a  system  of  particles  having  a  periodic 
motion  of  frequency  a>,  the  displacement  f  of  the  particles  in  a  given 
direction  in  space  may  be  represented  as  a  function  of  the  time  by 
a  trigonometric  series  of  the  form 


...............  (11) 

where  the  summation  is  to  be  extended  over  all  positive  integral 
values  of  T. 

We  see,  therefore,  that  the  frequency  of  the  radiation  emitted 
by  a  transition  between  two  stationary  states,  for  which  the  numbers 
n'  and  n"  are  large  in  proportion  to  their  difference,  will  coincide 
with  the  frequency  of  one  of  the  components  of  the  radiation,  which 
according  to  the  ordinary  ideas  of  radiation  would  be  expected  from 
the  motion  of  the  atom  in  these  states,  provided  the  last  factor  on 


ON  THE  SERIES  SPECTRA  OF  THE  ELEMENTS  27 

the  right-hand  side  of  equation  (10)  is  equal  to  1.   This  condition, 
which  is  identical  to  the  condition 


(12) 


is  in  fact  fulfilled,  if  we  give  to  K  its  value  as  found  from  measure- 
ments on  the  hydrogen  spectrum,  and  if  for  e,  m  and  h  we  use  the 
values  obtained  directly  from  experiment.  This  agreement  clearly 
gives  us  a  connection  between  the  spectrum  and  the  atomic  model  of 
hydrogen,  which  is  as  close  as  could  reasonably  be  expected  con- 
sidering the  fundamental  difference  between  the  ideas  of  the  quan- 
tum theory  and  of  the  ordinary  theory  of  radiation. 

The  correspondence  principle.  Let  us  now  consider  somewhat 
more  closely  this  relation  between  the  spectra  one  would  expect  on 
the  basis  of  the  quantum  theory,  and  on  the  ordinary  theory  of 
radiation.  The  frequencies  of  the  spectral  lines  calculated  according 
to  both  methods  agree  completely  in  the  region  where  the  stationary 
states  deviate  only  little  from  one  another.  We  must  not  forget, 
however,  that  the  mechanism  of  emission  in  both  cases  is  different. 
The  different  frequencies  corresponding  to  the  various  harmonic 
components  of  the  motion  are  emitted  simultaneously  according  to 
the  ordinary  theory  of  radiation  and  with  a  relative  intensity  de- 
pending directly  upon  the  ratio  of  the  amplitudes  of  these  oscilla- 
tions. But  according  to  the  quantum  theory  the  various  spectral 
lines  are  emitted  by  entirely  distinct  processes,  consisting  of  tran- 
sitions from  one  stationary  state  to  various  adjacent  states,  so  that 
the  radiation  corresponding  to  the  rth  "harmonic"  will  be  emitted 
by  a  transition  for  which  n'  —  n"  =  r.  The  relative  intensity 
with  which  each  particular  line  is  emitted  depends  consequently 
upon  the  relative  probability  of  the  occurrence  of  the  different 
transitions. 

This  correspondence  between  the  frequencies  determined  by  the 
two  methods  must  have  a  deeper  significance  and  we  are  led  to 
anticipate  that  it  will  also  apply  to  the  intensities.  This  is  equiva- 
lent to  the  statement  that,  when  the  quantum  numbers  are  large, 
the  relative  probability  of  a  particular  transition  is  connected  in  a 
simple  manner  with  the  amplitude  of  the  corresponding  harmonic 
component  in  the  motion. 


28  ON  THE  SERIES  SPECTRA  OF  THE  ELEMENTS 

This  peculiar  relation  suggests  a  general  law  for  the  occurrence 
of  transitions  between  stationary  states.  Thus  we  shall  assume  that 
even  when  the  quantum  numbers  are  small  the  possibility  of 
transition  between  two  stationary  states  is  connected  with  the 
presence  of  a  certain  harmonic  component  in  the  motion  of  the 
system.  If  the  numbers  n  and  n"  are  not  large  in  proportion  to 
their  difference,  the  numerical  value  of  the  amplitudes  of  these 
components  in  the  two  stationary  states  may  be  entirely  different. 
We  must  be  prepared  to  find,  therefore,  that  the  exact  connection 
between  the  probability  of  a  transition  and  the  amplitude  of  the 
corresponding  harmonic  component  in  the  motion  is  in  general 
complicated  like  the  connection  between  the  frequency  of  the  radia- 
tion and  that  of  the  component.  From  this  point  of  view,  for 
example,  the  green  line  Hp  of  the  hydrogen  spectrum  which  cor- 
responds to  a  transition  from  the  fourth  to  the  second  stationary 
state  may  be  considered  in  a  certain  sense  to  be  an  "octave"  of  the 
red  line  Ha,  corresponding  to  a  transition  from  the  third  to  the 
second  state,  even  though  the  frequency  of  the  first  line  is  by  no 
means  twice  as  great  as  that  of  the  latter.  In  fact,  the  transition 
giving  rise  to  Hp  may  be  regarded  as  due  to  the  presence  of  a  har- 
monic oscillation  in  the  motion  of  the  atom,  which  is  an  octave 
higher  than  the  oscillation  giving  rise  to  the  emission  of  Ha. 

Before  considering  other  spectra,  where  numerous  opportunities 
will  be  found  to  use  this  point  of  view,  I  shall  briefly  mention  an 
interesting  application  to  the  Planck  oscillator.  If  from  (1)  and  (4) 
we  calculate  the  frequency,  which  would  correspond  to  a  transition 
between  two  particular  states  of  such  an  oscillator,  we  find 

v  =  (ri-n")a>,  ........................  (13) 


where  n'  and  n"  are  the  numbers  characterizing  the  states.  It  was 
an  essential  assumption  in  Planck's  theory  that  the  frequency  of 
the  radiation  emitted  and  absorbed  by  the  oscillator  is  always  equal 
to  to.  We  see  that  this  assumption  is  equivalent  to  the  assertion 
that  transitions  occur  only  between  two  successive  stationary  states 
in  sharp  contrast  to  the  hydrogen  atom.  According  to  our  view, 
however,  this  was  exactly  what  might  have  been  expected,  for  we 
must  assume  that  the  essential  difference  between  the  oscillator 
and  the  hydrogen  atom  is  that  the  motion  of  the  oscillator  is  simple 


ON  THE  SERIES  SPECTRA  OF  THE  ELEMENTS         29 

harmonic.  We  can  see  that  it  is  possible  to  develop  a  formal  theory 
of  radiation,  in  which  the  spectrum  of  hydrogen  and  the  simple 
spectrum  of  a  Planck  oscillator  appear  completely  analogous.  This 
theory  can  only  be  formulated  by  one  and  the  same  condition  for 
a  system  as  simple  as  the  oscillator.  In  general  this  condition 
breaks  up  into  two  parts,  one  concerning  the  fixation  of  the  stationary 
states,  and  the  other  relating  to  the  frequency  of  the  radiation 
emitted  by  a  transition  between  these  states. 

General  spectral  laws.  Although  the  series  spectra  of  the 
elements  of  higher  atomic  number  have  a  more  complicated  struc- 
ture than  the  hydrogen  spectrum,  simple  laws  have  been  discovered 
showing  a  remarkable  analogy  to  the  Balmer  formula.  Rydberg 
and  Ritz  showed  that  the  frequencies  in  the  series  spectra  of  many 
elements  can  be  expressed  by  a  formula  of  the  type 

*  =/*»(»'')-/*•("'),     (14) 

where  n'  and  n"  are  two  whole  numbers  and  fk>  and  fk»  are  two 
functions  belonging  to  a  series  of  functions  characteristic  of  the 
element.  These  functions  vary  in  a  simple  manner  with  n  and  in 
particular  converge  to  zero  for  increasing  values  of  n.  The  various 
series  of  lines  are  obtained  from  this  formula  by  allowing  the  first 
term  fa  (n")  to  remain  constant,  while  a  series  of  consecutive  whole 
numbers  are  substituted  for  n'  in  the  second  terrn/f  (n').  According 
to  the  Ritz  combination  principle  the  entire  spectrum  may  then 
be  obtained  by  forming  every  possible  combination  of  two  values 
among  all  the  quantities  fk  (n). 

The  fact  that  the  frequency  of  each  line  of  the  spectrum  may  be 
written  as  the  difference  of  two  simple  expressions  depending  upon 
whole  numbers  suggests  at  once  that  the  terms  on  the  right-hand 
side  multiplied  by  h  may  be  placed  equal  to  the  energy  in  the 
various  stationary  states  of  the  atom.  The  existence  in  the  spectra 
of  the  other  elements  of  a  number  of  separate  functions  of  n  compels 
us  to  assume  the  presence  not  of  one  but  of  a  number  of  series  of 
stationary  states,  the  energy  of  the  nth  state  of  the  &th  series  apart 
from  an  arbitrary  additive  constant  being  given  by 

Ek(n)  =  -hfk(n} (15) 

This  complicated  character  of  the  ensemble  of  stationary  states  of 
atoms  of  higher  atomic  number  is  exactly  what  was  to  be  expected 


30 


ON  THE  SERIES  SPECTRA  OF  THE  ELEMENTS 


from  the  relation  between  the  spectra  calculated  on  the  quantum 
theory,  and  the  decomposition  of  the  motions  of  the  atoms  into 
harmonic  oscillations.  From  this  point  of  view  we  may  regard  the 
simple  character  of  the  stationary  states  of  the  hydrogen  atom  as 
intimately  connected  with  the  simple  periodic  character  of  this 
atom.  Where  the  neutral  atom  contains  more  than  one  electron,  we 
find  much  more  complicated  motions  with  correspondingly  compli- 
cated harmonic  components.  We  must  therefore  expect  a  more 
complicated  ensemble  of  stationary  states,  if  we  are  still  to  have  a 
corresponding  relation  between  the  motions  in  the  atom  and  the 
spectrum.  In  the  course  of  the  lecture  we  shall  trace  this  corre- 
spondence in  detail,  and  we  shall  be  led  to  a  simple  explanation  of 
the  apparent  capriciousness  in  the  occurrence  of  lines  predicted  by 
the  combination  principle. 

The  following  figure  gives  a  survey  of  the  stationary  states  of 
the  sodium  atom  deduced  from  the  series  terms. 


(k-l) 
(X-2) 
(k-3) 
(te-4) 


J  a  *      5  a 

Diagram  of  the  series  spectrum  of  sodium. 

The  stationary  states  are  represented  by  black  dots  whose  distance 
from  the  vertical  line  a — a  is  proportional  to  the  numerical  value 
of  the  energy  in  the  states.  The  arrows  in  the  figure  indicate  the 
transitions  giving  those  lines  of  the  sodium  spectrum  which  appear 
under  the  usual  conditions  of  excitation.  The  arrangement  of  the 
states  in  horizontal  rows  corresponds  to  the  ordinary  arrangement 
of  the  "spectral  terms"  in  the  spectroscopic  tables.  Thus,  the  states 
in  the  first  row  (8)  correspond  to  the  variable  term  in  the  "sharp 
series,"  the  lines  of  which  are  emitted  by  transitions  from  these 
states  to  the  first  state  in  the  second  row.  The  states  in  the  second 


ON  THE  SERIES  SPECTRA  OF  THE  ELEMENTS  31 

row  (P)  correspond  to  the  variable  term  in  the  "principal  series" 
which  is  emitted  by  transitions  from  these  states  to  the  first  state 
in  the  S  row.  The  D  states  correspond  to  the  variable  term  in  the 
"  diffuse  series,"  which  like  the  sharp  series  is  emitted  by  transitions 
to  the  first  state  in  the  P  row,  and  finally  the  B  states  correspond 
to  the  variable  term  in  the  "Bergmann"  series  (fundamental  series), 
in  which  transitions  take  place  to  the  first  state  in  the  D  row.  The 
manner  in  which  the  various  rows  are  arranged  with  reference  to 
one  another  will  be  used  to  illustrate  the  more  detailed  theory 
which  will  be  discussed  later.  The  apparent  capriciousness  of  the 
combination  principle,  which  I  mentioned,  consists  in  the  fact  that 
under  the  usual  conditions  of  excitation  not  all  the  lines  belonging 
to  possible  combinations  of  the  terms  of  the  sodium  spectrum  appear, 
but  only  those  indicated  in  the  figure  by  arrows. 

The  general  question  of  the  fixation  of  the  stationary  states  of 
an  atom  containing  several  electrons  presents  difficulties  of  a  pro- 
found character  which  are  perhaps  still  far  from  completely  solved. 
It  is  possible,  however,  to  obtain  an  immediate  insight  into  the 
stationary  states  involved  in  the  emission  of  the  series  spectra  by 
considering  the  empirical  laws  which  have  been  discovered  about 
the  spectral  terms.  According  to  the  well-known  law  discovered  by 
Rydberg  for  the  spectra  of  elements  emitted  under  the  usual  con- 
ditions of  excitation  the  functions  fk(n)  appearing  in  formula  (14) 
can  be  written  in  the  form 

/*<»)-§**<»),    (16) 

where  <f>k  (n)  represents  a  function  which  converges  to  unity  for 
large  values  of  n.  K  is  the  same  constant  which  appears  in  formula 
(5)  for  the  spectrum  of  hydrogen.  This  result  must  evidently  be 
explained  by  supposing  the  atom  to  be  electrically  neutral  in  these 
states  and  one  electron  to  be  moving  round  the  nucleus  in  an  orbit 
the  dimensions  of  which  are  very  large  in  proportion  to  the  distance 
of  the  other  electrons  from  the  nucleus.  We  see,  indeed,  that  in 
this  case  the  electric  force  acting  on  the  outer  electron  will  to  a 
first  approximation  be  the  same  as  that  acting  upon  the  electron 
in  the  hydrogen  atom,  and  the  approximation  will  be  the  better 
the  larger  the  orbit. 


32  ON  THE  SERIES  SPECTRA  OF  THE  ELEMENTS 

On  account  of  the  limited  time  I  shall  not  discuss  how  this 
explanation  of  the  universal  appearance  of  Rydberg's  constant  in 
the  arc  spectra  is  convincingly  supported  by  the  investigation  of 
the  "  spark  spectra."  These  are  emitted  by  the  elements  under  the 
influence  of  very  strong  electrical  discharges,  and  come  from  ionized 
not  neutral  atoms.  It  is  important,  however,  that  I  should  indicate 
briefly  how  the  fundamental  ideas  of  the  theory  and  the  assumption 
that  in  the  states  corresponding  to  the  spectra  one  electron  moves 
in  an  orbit  around  the  others,  are  both  supported  by  investigations 
on  selective  absorption  and  the  excitation  of  spectral  lines  by 
bombardment  by  electrons. 

Absorption  and  excitation  of  radiation.  Just  as  we  have 
assumed  that  each  emission  of  radiation  is  due  to  a  transition  from 
a  stationary  state  of  higher  to  one  of  lower  energy,  so  also  we  must 
assume  absorption  of  radiation  by  the  atom  to  be  due  to  a  transition 
in  the  opposite  direction.  For  an  element  to  absorb  light  corre- 
sponding to  a  given  line  in  its  series  spectrum,  it  is  therefore 
necessary  for  the  atom  of  this  element  to  be  in  that  one  of  the  two 
states  connected  with  the  line  possessing  the  smaller  energy  value. 
If  we  now  consider  an  element  whose  atoms  in  the  gaseous  state 
do  not  combine  into  molecules,  it  will  be  necessary  to  assume  that 
under  ordinary  conditions  nearlyall  the  atoms  exist  in  that  stationary 
state  in  which  the  value  of  the  energy  is  a  minimum.  This  state 
I  shall  call  the  normal  state.  We  must  therefore  expect  that  the 
absorption  spectrum  of  a  monatomic  gas  will  contain  only  those 
lines  of  the  series  spectrum,  whose  emission  corresponds  to  tran- 
sitions to  the  normal  state.  This  expectation  is  completely  confirmed 
by  the  spectra  of  the  alkali  metals.  The  absorption  spectrum  of 
sodium  vapour,  for  example,  exhibits  lines  corresponding  only  to 
the  principal  series,  which  as  mentioned  in  the  description  of  the 
figure  corresponds  with  transitions  to  the  state  of  minimum  energy. 
Further  confirmation  of  this  view  of  the  process  of  absorption  is 
given  by  experiments  on  resonance  radiation.  Wood  first  showed 
that  sodium  vapour  subjected  to  light  corresponding  to  the  first 
line  of  the  principal  series — the  familiar  yellow  line — acquires  the 
ability  of  again  emitting  a  radiation  consisting  only  of  the  light  of 
this  line.  We  can  explain  this  by  supposing  the  sodium  atom  to 


ON  THE  SERIES  SPECTRA  OF  THE  ELEMENTS  33 

have  been  transferred  from  the  normal  state  to  the  first  state  in 
the  second  row.  The  fact  that  the  resonance  radiation  does  not 
exhibit  the  same  degree  of  polarization  as  the  incident  light  is 
in  perfect  agreement  with  our  assumption  that  the  radiation  from 
the  excited  vapour  is  not  a  resonance  phenomenon  in  the  sense  of 
the  ordinary  theory  of  radiation,  but  on  the  contrary  depends  on  a 
process  which  is  not  directly  connected  with  the  incident  radiation. 
The  phenomenon  of  the  resonance  radiation  of  the  yellow  sodium 
line  is,  however,  not  quite  so  simple  as  I  have  indicated,  since,  as 
you  know,  this  line  is  really  a  doublet.  This  means  that  the  variable 
terms  of  the  principal  series  are  not  simple  but  are  represented  by 
two  values  slightly  different  from  one  another.  According  to  our 
picture  of  the  origin  of  the  sodium  spectrum  this  means  that  the 
P  states  in  the  second  row  in  the  figure — as  opposed  to  the  S  states 
in  the  first  row — are  not  simple,  but  that  for  each  place  in  this  row 
there  are  two  stationary  states.  The  energy  values  differ  so  little 
from  one  another  that  it  is  impossible  to  represent  them  in  the 
figure  as  separate  dots.  The  emission  (and  absorption)  of  the  two 
components  of  the  yellow  line  are,  therefore,  connected  with  two 
different  processes.  This  was  beautifully  shown  by  some  later  re- 
searches of  Wood  and  Dunoyer.  They  found  that  if  sodium  vapour 
is  subjected  to  radiation  from  only  one  of  the  two  components  of 
the  yellow  line,  the  resonance  radiation,  at  least  at  low  pressures, 
consists  only  of  this  component.  These  experiments  were  later 
continued  by  Strutt,  and  were  extended  to  the  case  where  the 
exciting  line  corresponded  to  the  second  line  in  the  principal  series. 
Strutt  found  that  the  resonance  radiation  consisted  apparently  only 
to  a  small  extent  of  light  of  the  same  frequency  as  the  incident 
light,  while  the  greater  part  consisted  of  the  familiar  yellow  line. 
This  result  must  appear  very  astonishing  on  the  ordinary  ideas  of 
resonance,  since,  as  Strutt  pointed  out,  no  rational  connection  exists 
between  the  frequencies  of  the  first  and  second  lines  of  the  principal 
series.  It  is  however  easily  explained  from  our  point  of  view.  From 
the  figure  it  can  be  seen  that  when  an  atom  has  been  transferred 
into  the  second  state  in  the  second  row,  in  addition  to  the  direct 
return  to  the  normal  state,  there  are  still  two  other  transitions 
which  may  give  rise  to  radiation,  namely  the  transitions  to  the 
second  state  in  the  first  row  and  to  the  first  state  in  the  third  row. 
B.  3 


34  ON  THE  SERIES  SPECTRA  OF  THE  ELEMENTS 

The  experiments  seem  to  indicate  that  the  second  of  these  three 
transitions  is  most  probable,  and  I  shall  show  later  that  there  is 
some  theoretical  justification  for  this  conclusion.  By  this  transition, 
which  results  in  the  emission  of  an  infra-red  line  which  could  not 
be  observed  with  the  experimental  arrangement,  the  atom  is  taken 
to  the  second  state  of  the  first  row,  and  from  this  state  only 
one  transition  is  possible,  which  again  gives  an  infra-red  line.  This 
transition  takes  the  atom  to  the  first  state  in  the  second  row,  and 
the  subsequent  transition  to  the  normal  state  then  gives  rise  to  the 
yellow  line.  Strutt  discovered  another  equally  surprising  result, 
that  this  yellow  resonance  radiation  seemed  to  consist  of  both 
components  of  the  first  line  of  the  principal  series,  even  when  the 
incident  light  consisted  of  only  one  component  of  the  second  line 
of  the  principal  series.  This  is  in  beautiful  agreement  with  our 
picture  of  the  phenomenon.  We  must  remember  that  the  states  in 
the  first  row  are  simple,  so  when  the  atom  has  arrived  in  one  of 
these  it  has  lost  every  possibility  of  later  giving  any  indication 
from  which  of  the  two  states  in  the  second  row  it  originally  came. 

Sodium  vapour,  in  addition  to  the  absorption  corresponding  to 
the  lines  of  the  principal  series,  exhibits  a  selective  absorption  in  a 
continuous  spectral  region  beginning  at  the  limit  of  this  series  and 
extending  into  the  ultra  violet.  This  confirms  in  a  striking  manner 
our  assumption  that  the  absorption  of  the  lines  of  the  principal 
series  of  sodium  results  in  final  states  of  the  atom  in  which  one  of 
the  electrons  revolves  in  larger  and  larger  orbits.  For  we  must 
assume  that  this  continuous  absorption  corresponds  to  transitions 
from  the  normal  state  to  states  in  which  the  electron  is  in  a  position 
to  remove  itself  infinitely  far  from  the  nucleus.  This  phenomenon 
exhibits  a  complete  analogy  with  the  photoelectric  effect  from  an 
illuminated  metal  plate  in  which,  by  using  light  of  a  suitable 
frequency,  electrons  of  any  velocity  can  be  obtained.  The  frequency, 
however,  must  always  lie  above  a  certain  limit  connected  according 
to  Einstein's  theory  in  a  simple  manner  with  the  energy  necessary 
to  bring  an  electron  out  of  the  metal. 

This  view  of  the  origin  of  the  emission  and  absorption  spectra 
has  been  confirmed  in  a  very  interesting  manner  by  experiments 
on  the  excitation  of  spectral  lines  and  production  of  ionization  by 
electron  bombardment.  The  chief  advance  in  this  field  is  due  to  the 


ON  THE  SERIES  SPECTRA  OF  THE  ELEMENTS  35 

well-known  experiments  of  Franck  and  Hertz.  These  investigators 
obtained  their  first  important  results  from  their  experiments  on 
mercury  vapour,  whose  properties  particularly  facilitate  such  ex- 
periments. On  account  of  the  great  importance  of  the  results,  these 
experiments  have  been  extended  to  most  gases  and  metals  that  can 
be  obtained  in  a  gaseous  state.  With  the  aid  of  the  figure  I  shall 
briefly  illustrate  the  results  for  the  case  of  sodium  vapour.  It  was 
found  that  the  electrons  upon  colliding  with  the  atoms  were  thrown 
back  with  undiminished  velocity  when  their  energy  was  less  than 
that  required  to  transfer  the  atom  from  the  normal  state  to  the 
next  succeeding  stationary  state  of  higher  energy  value.  In  the 
case  of  sodium  vapour  this  means  from  the  first  state  in  the  first 
row  to  the  first  state  in  the  second  row.  As  soon,  however,  as  the 
energy  of  the  electron  reaches  this  critical  value,  a  new  type  of 
collision  takes  place,  in  which  the  electron  loses  all  its  kinetic 
energy,  while  at  the  same  time  the  vapour  is  excited  and  emits  a 
radiation  corresponding  to  the  yellow  line.  This  is  what  would  be 
expected,  if  by  the  collision  the  atom  was  transferred  from  the 
normal  state  to  the  first  one  in  the  second  row.  For  some  time  it 
was  uncertain  to  what  extent  this  explanation  was  correct,  since 
in  the  experiments  on  mercury  vapour  it  was  found  that,  together 
with  the  occurrence  of  non-elastic  impacts,  ions  were  always  formed 
in  the  vapour.  From  our  figure,  however,  we  would  expect  ions 
to  be  produced  only  when  the  kinetic  energy  of  the  electrons  is 
sufficiently  great  to  bring  the  atom  out  of  the  normal  state  to  the 
common  limit  of  the  states.  Later  experiments,  especially  by  Davis 
and  Goucher,  have  settled  this  point.  It  has  been  shown  that  ions 
can  only  be  directly  produced  by  collisions  when  the  kinetic  energy 
of  the  electrons  corresponds  to  the  limit  of  the  series,  and  that  the 
ionization  found  at  first  was  an  indirect  effect  arising  from  the 
photoelectric  effect  produced  at  the  metal  walls  of  the  apparatus 
by  the  radiation  arising  from  the  return  of  the  mercury  atoms  to 
the  normal  state.  These  experiments  provide  a  direct  and  inde- 
pendent proof  of  the  reality  of  the  distinctive  stationary  states, 
whose  existence  we  were  led  to  infer  from  the  series  spectra.  At 
the  same  time  we  get  a  striking  impression  of  the  insufficiency  of 
the  ordinary  electrodynamical  and  mechanical  conceptions  for  the 
description  of  atomic  processes,  not  only  as  regards  the  emission 

3—2 


36  ON  THE  SERIES  SPECTRA  OF  THE  ELEMENTS 

of  radiation  but  also  in  such  phenomena  as  the  collision  of  free 
electrons  with  atoms. 

III.    DEVELOPMENT  OF  THE  QUANTUM  THEORY 
OF  SPECTRA 

We  see  that  it  is  possible  by  making  use  of  a  few  simple  ideas 
to  obtain  a  certain  insight  into  the  origin  of  the  series  spectra. 
But  when  we  attempt  to  penetrate  more  deeply,  difficulties  arise. 
In  fact,  for  systems  which  are  not  simply  periodic  it  is  not  possible 
to  obtain  sufficient  information  about  the  motions  of  these  systems 
in  the  stationary  states  from  the  numerical  values  of  the  energy 
alone ;  more  determining  factors  are  required  for  the  fixation  of 
the  motion.  We  meet  the  same  difficulties  when  we  try  to  explain 
in  detail  the  characteristic  effect  of  external  forces  upon  the  spectrum 
of  hydrogen.  A  foundation  for  further  advances  in  this  field  has 
been  made  in  recent  years  through  a  development  of  the  quantum 
theory,  which  allows  a  fixation  of  the  stationary  states  not  only  in 
the  case  of  simple  periodic  systems,  but  also  for  certain  classes  of 
non-periodic  systems.  These  are  the  conditionally  periodic  systems 
whose  equations  of  motion  can  be  solved  by  a  "  separation  of  the 
variables."  If  generalized  coordinates  are  used  the  description  of 
the  motion  of  these  systems  can  be  reduced  to  the  consideration 
of  a  number  of  generalized  "  components  of  motion."  Each  of  these 
corresponds  to  the  change  of  only  one  of  the  coordinates  and  may 
therefore  in  a  certain  sense  be  regarded  as  "  independent."  The 
method  for  the  fixation  of  the  stationary  states  consists  in  fixing 
the  motion  of  each  of  these  components  by  a  condition,  which  can 
be  considered  as  a  direct  generalization  of  condition  (1)  for  a 
Planck  oscillator,  so  that  the  stationary  states  are  in  general 
characterized  by  as  many  whole  numbers  as  the  number  of  the 
degrees  of  freedom  which  the  system  possesses.  A  considerable 
number  of  physicists  have  taken  part  in  this  development  of  the 
quantum  theory,  including  Planck  himself.  I  also  wish  to  mention 
the  important  contribution  made  by  Ehrenfest  to  this  subject  on 
the  limitations  of  the  applicability  of  the  laws  of  mechanics  to 
atomic  processes.  The  decisive  advance  in  the  application  of  the 
quantum  theory  to  spectra,  however,  is  due  to  Sommerfeld  and  his 
followers.  However,  I  shall  not  further  discuss  the  systematic  form 


ON  THE  SERIES  SPECTRA  OF  THE  ELEMENTS  37 

in  which  these  authors  have  presented  their  results.  In  a  paper  which 
appeared  some  time  ago  in  the  Transactions  of  the  Copenhagen 
Academy,  I  have  shown  that  the  spectra,  calculated  with  the  aid 
of  this  method  for  the  fixation  of  the  stationary  states,  exhibit  a 
correspondence  with  the  spectra  which  should  correspond  to  the 
motion  of  the  system  similar  to  that  which  we  have  already  con- 
sidered in  the  case  of  hydrogen.  With  the  aid  of  this  general 
correspondence  I  shall  try  in  the  remainder  of  this  lecture  to 
show  how  it  is  possible  to  present  the  theory  of  series  spectra 
and  the  effects  produced  by  external  fields  of  force  upon  these 
spectra  in  a  form  which  may  be  considered  as  the  natural  generali- 
zation of  the  foregoing  considerations.  This  form  appears  to  me 
to  be  especially  suited  for  future  work  in  the  theory  of  spectra, 
since  it  allows  of  an  immediate  insight  into  problems  for  which 
the  methods  mentioned  above  fail  on  account  of  the  complexity  of 
the  motions  in  the  atom. 

Effect  of  external  forces  on  the  hydrogen  spectrum.    We 

shall  now  proceed  to  investigate  the  effect  of  small  perturbing 
forces  upon  the  spectrum  of  the  simple  system  consisting  of  a  single 
electron  revolving  about  a  nucleus.  For  the  sake  of  simplicity  we 
shall  for  the  moment  disregard  the  variation  of  the  mass  of  the 
electron  with  its  velocity.  The  consideration  of  the  small  changes 
in  the  motion  due  to  this  variation  has  been  of  great  importance 
in  the  development  of  Sommerfeld's  theory  which  originated  in  the 
explanation  of  the  fine  structure  of  the  hydrogen  lines.  This  fine 
structure  is  due  to  the  fact,  that  taking  into  account  the  variation 
of  mass  with  velocity  the  orbit  of  the  electron  deviates  a  little 
from  a  simple  ellipse  and  is  no  longer  exactly  periodic.  This  devia- 
tion from  a  Keplerian  motion  is,  however,  very  small  compared 
with  the  perturbations  due  to  the  presence  of  external  forces,  such 
as  occur  in  experiments  on  the  Zeeman  and  Stark  effects.  In  atoms 
of  higher  atomic  number  it  is  also  negligible  compared  with  the 
disturbing  effect  of  the  inner  electrons  on  the  motion  of  the  outer 
electron.  The  neglect  of  the  change  in  mass  will  therefore  have  no 
important  influence  upon  the  explanation  of  the  Zeeman  and  Stark 
effects,  or  upon  the  explanation  of  the  difference  between  the 
hydrogen  spectrum  and  the  spectra  of  other  elements. 


38  ON  THE  SERIES  SPECTRA  OF  THE  ELEMENTS 

We  shall  therefore  as  before  consider  the  motion  of  the  un- 
perturbed hydrogen  atom  as  simply  periodic  and  inquire  in  the 
first  place  about  the  stationary  states  corresponding  to  this  motion. 
The  energy  in  these  states  will  then  be  determined  by  expression  (7) 
which  was  derived  from  the  spectrum  of  hydrogen.  The  energy  of 
the  system  being  given,  the  major  axis  of  the  elliptical  orbit  of  the 
electron  and  its  frequency  of  revolution  are  also  determined.  Sub- 
stituting in  formulae  (7)  and  (8)  the  expression  for  K  given  in  (12), 
we  obtain  for  the  energy,  major  axis  and  frequency  of  revolution 
in  the  nth  state  of  the  unperturbed  atom  the  expressions 


We  must  further  assume  that  in  the  stationary  states  of  the 
unperturbed  system  the  form  of  the  orbit  is  so  far  undetermined 
that  the  excentricity  can  vary  continuously.  This  is  not  only  im- 
mediately indicated  by  the  principle  of  correspondence,  —  since  the 
frequency  of  revolution  is  determined  only  by  the  energy  and  not 
by  the  excentricity,  —  but  also  by  the  fact  that  the  presence  of  any 
small  external  forces  will  in  general,  in  the  course  of  time,  produce 
a  finite  change  in  the  position  as  well  as  in  the  excentricity  of  the 
periodic  orbit,  while  in  the  major  axis  it  can  produce  only  small 
changes  proportional  to  the  intensity  of  the  perturbing  forces. 

In  order  to  fix  the  stationary  states  of  systems  in  the  presence 
of  a  given  conservative  external  field  of  force,  we  shall  have  to 
investigate,  on  the  basis  of  the  principle  of  correspondence,  how 
these  forces  affect  the  decomposition  of  the  motion  into  harmonic 
oscillations.  Owing  to  the  external  forces  the  form  and  position  of 
the  orbit  will  vary  continuously.  In  the  general  case  these  changes 
will  be  so  complicated  that  it  will  not  be  possible  to  decompose  the 
perturbed  motion  into  discrete  harmonic  oscillations.  In  such  a 
case  we  must  expect  that  the  perturbed  system  will  not  possess 
any  sharply  separated  stationary  states.  Although  each  emission 
of  radiation  must  be  assumed  to  be  monochromatic  and  to  proceed 
according  to  the  general  frequency  condition  we  shall  therefore 
expect  the  final  effect  to  be  a  broadening  of  the  sharp  spectral  lines 
of  the  unperturbed  system.  In  certain  cases,  however,  the  perturba- 


ON  THE  SERIES  SPECTRA  OF  THE  ELEMENTS  39 

tions  will  be  of  such  a  regular  character  that  the  perturbed  system 
can  be  decomposed  into  harmonic  oscillations,  although  the  ensemble 
of  these  oscillations  will  naturally  be  of  a  more  complicated  kind 
than  in  the  unperturbed  system.  This  happens,  for  example,  when 
the  variations  of  the  orbit  with  respect  to  time  are  periodic.  In 
this  case  harmonic  oscillations  will  appear  in  the  motion  of  the 
system  the  frequencies  of  which  are  equal  to  whole  multiples  of  the 
period  of  the  orbital  perturbations,  and  in  the  spectrum  to  be 
expected  on  the  basis  of  the  ordinary  theory  of  radiation  we  would 
expect  components  corresponding  to  these  frequencies.  According 
to  the  principle  of  correspondence  we  are  therefore  immediately 
led  to  the  conclusion,  that  to  each  stationary  state  in  the  unper- 
turbed system  there  corresponds  a  number  of  stationary  states  in 
the  perturbed  system  in  such  a  manner,  that  for  a  transition 
between  two  of  these  states  a  radiation  is  emitted,  whose  frequency 
stands  in  the  same  relationship  to  the  periodic  course  of  the 
variations  in  the  orbit,  as  the  spectrum  of  a  simple  periodic  system 
does  to  its  motion  in  the  stationary  states. 

The  Stark  effect.  An  instructive  example  of  the  appearance  of 
periodic  perturbations  is  obtained  when  hydrogen  is  subjected  to 
the  effect  of  a  homogeneous  electric  field.  The  excentricity  and 
the  position  of  the  orbit  vary  continuously  under  the  influence  of 
the  field.  During  these  changes,  however,  it  is  found  that  the 
centre  of  the  orbit  remains  in  a  plane  perpendicular  to  the  direc- 
tion of  the  electric  force  and  that  its  motion  in  this  plane  is 
simply  periodic.  When  the  centre  has  returned  to  its  starting 
point,  the  orbit  will  resume  its  original  excentricity  and  position, 
and  from  this  moment  the  entire  cycle  of  orbits  will  be  repeated. 
In  this  case  the  determination  of  the  energy  of  the  stationary 
states  of  the  disturbed  system  is  extremely  simple,  since  it  is  found 
that  the  period  of  the  disturbance  does  not  depend  upon  the 
original  configuration  of  the  orbit,  nor  therefore  upon  the  position 
of  the  plane  in  which  the  centre  of  the  orbit  moves,  but  only  upon 
the  major  axis  and  the  frequency  of  revolution.  From  a  simple 
calculation  it  is  found  that  the  period  <r  is  given  by  the  following 
formula 


40  ON  THE  SERIES  SPECTRA  OF  THE  ELEMENTS 

where  F  is  the  intensity  of  the  external  electric  field.  From 
analogy  with  the  fixation  of  the  distinctive  energy  values  of  a 
Planck  oscillator  we  must  therefore  expect  that  the  energy  difference 
between  two  different  states,  corresponding  to  the  same  stationary 
state  of  the  unperturbed  system,  will  simply  be  equal  to  a  whole 
multiple  of  the  product  of  h  by  the  period  a  of  the  perturbations. 
We  are  therefore  immediately  led  to  the  following  expression  for 
the  energy  of  the  stationary  states  of  the  perturbed  system, 

(19) 


where  En  depends  only  upon  the  number  n  characterizing  the 
stationary  state  of  the  unperturbed  system,  while  k  is  a  new  whole 
number  which  in  this  case  may  be  either  positive  or  negative.  As 
we  shall  see  below,  consideration  of  the  relation  between  the  energy 
and  the  motion  of  the  system  shows  that  k  must  be  numerically 
less  than  n,  if,  as  before,  we  place  the  quantity  En  equal  to  the 
energy  —  Wn  of  the  nth  stationary  state  of  the  undisturbed  atom. 
Substituting  the  values  of  Wn,  tan  and  an  given  by  (17)  in  formula 
(19)  we  get 

(20) 


To  find  the  effect  of  an  electric  field  upon  the  lines  of  the  hydrogen 
spectrum,  we  use  the  frequency  condition  (4)  and  obtain  for  the 
frequency  v  of  the  radiation  emitted  by  a  transition  between  two 
stationary  states  defined  by  the  numbers  ri,  k'  and  n",  k" 

Sh.F  ,  ,.,       ,/// 


It  is  well  known  that  this  formula  provides  a  complete  explana- 
tion of  the  Stark  effect  of  the  hydrogen  lines.  It  corresponds 
exactly  with  the  one  obtained  by  a  different  method  by  Epstein 
and  Schwarzschild.  They  used  the  fact  that  the  hydrogen  atom  in 
a  homogeneous  electric  field  is  a  conditionally  periodic  system 
permitting  a  separation  of  variables  by  the  use  of  parabolic  co- 
ordinates. The  stationary  states  were  fixed  by  applying  quantum 
conditions  to  each  of  these  variables. 

We  shall  now  consider  more  closely  the  correspondence  between 
the  changes  in  the  spectrum  of  hydrogen  due  to  the  presence  of 


ON  THE  SERIES  SPECTRA  OF  THE  ELEMENTS  41 

an  electric  field  and  the  decomposition  of  the  perturbed  motion 
of  the  atom  into  its  harmonic  components.  Instead  of  the  simple 
decomposition  into  harmonic  components  corresponding  to  a  simple 
Kepler  motion,  the  displacement  f  of  the  electron  in  a  given 
direction  in  space  can  be  expressed  in  the  present  case  by  the 
formula 

f  =  2<7T)(Ccos  27r  {t(T<o  +  Ka)  +  cTilt}  ..........  (22) 


where  a>  is  the  average  frequency  of  revolution  in  the  perturbed 
orbit  and  er  is  the  period  of  the  orbital  perturbations,  while  CT,K  and 
cT>(e  are  constants.  The  summation  is  to  be  extended  over  all  integral 
values  for  r  and  re. 

If  we  now  consider  a  transition  between  two  stationary  states 
characterized  by  certain  numbers  n',  k'  and  n",  k",  we  find  that  in 
the  region  where  these  numbers  are  large  compared  with  their 
differences  n'  —  n"  and  k'  —  k",  the  frequency  of  the  spectral  line 
which  is  emitted  will  be  given  approximately  by  the  formula 

v  ~  (ri  -  n")  a>  +  (kf  -  k")  <r  ................  (23) 

We  see,  therefore,  that  we  have  obtained  a  relation  between  the 
spectrum  and  the  motion  of  precisely  the  same  character  as  in  the 
simple  case  of  the  unperturbed  hydrogen  atom.  We  have  here  a 
similar  correspondence  between  the  harmonic  component  in  the 
motion,  corresponding  to  definite  values  for  r  and  «  in  formula  (22), 
and  the  transition  between  two  stationary  states  for  which  n'—  n"=  r 
and  &'-&"  =  *. 

A  number  of  interesting  results  can  be  obtained  from  this 
correspondence  by  considering  the  motion  in  more  detail.  Each 
harmonic  component  in  expression  (22)  for  which  r  +  K  is  an  even 
number  corresponds  to  a  linear  oscillation  parallel  to  the  direction 
of  the  electric  field,  while  each  component  for  which  r  +  K  is  odd 
corresponds  to  an  elliptical  oscillation  perpendicular  to  this  direc- 
tion. The  correspondence  principle  suggests  at  once  that  these 
facts  are  connected  with  the  characteristic  polarization  observed  in 
the  Stark  effect.  We  would  anticipate  that  a  transition  for  which 
(n'  —  n")  +  (k'  —  k")  is  even  would  give  rise  to  a  component  with  an 
electric  vector  parallel  to  the  field,  while  a  transition  for  which 
(n'  —  n")  +  (k'  —  k")  is  odd  would  correspond  to  a  component  with  an 


42  ON  THE  SERIES  SPECTKA  OF  THE  ELEMENTS 

electric  vector  perpendicular  to  the  field.  These  results  have  been 
fully  confirmed  by  experiment  and  correspond  to  the  empirical  rule 
of  polarization,  which  Epstein  proposed  in  his  first  paper  on  the 
Stark  effect. 

The  applications  of  the  correspondence  principle  that  have  so 
far  been  described  have  been  purely  qualitative  in  character.  It  is 
possible  however  to  obtain  a  quantitative  estimate  of  the  relative 
intensity  of  the  various  components  of  the  Stark  effect  of  hydrogen, 
by  correlating  the  numerical  values  of  the  coefficients  CT>K  in  formula 
(22)  with  the  probability  of  the  corresponding  transitions  between 
the  stationary  states.  This  problem  has  been  treated  in  detail  by 
Kramers  in  a  recently  published  dissertation.  In  this  he  gives  a 
thorough  discussion  of  the  application  of  the  correspondence  prin- 
ciple to  the  question  of  the  intensity  of  spectral  lines. 

The  Zeeman  effect.  The  problem  of  the  effect  of  a  homogeneous 
magnetic  field  upon  the  hydrogen  lines  may  be  treated  in  an 
entirely  analogous  manner.  The  effect  on  the  motion  of  the  hy- 
drogen atom  consists  simply  of  the  superposition  of  a  uniform  ro- 
tation upon  the  motion  of  the  electron  in  the  unperturbed  atom. 
The  axis  of  rotation  is  parallel  with  the  direction  of  the  magnetic 
force,  while  the  frequency  of  revolution  is  given  by  the  formula 


.(24) 


where  H  is  the  intensity  of  the  field  and  c  the  velocity  of  light. 

Again  we  have  a  case  where  the  perturbations  are  simply 
periodic  and  where  the  period  of  the  perturbations  is  independent 
of  the  form  and  position  of  the  orbit,  and  in  the  present  case,  even 
of  the  major  axis.  Similar  considerations  apply  therefore  as  in  the 
case  of  the  Stark  effect,  and  we  must  expect  that  the  energy  in  the 
stationary  states  will  again  be  given  by  formula  (19),  if  we  sub- 
stitute for  tr  the  value  given  in  expression  (24).  This  result  is 
also  in  complete  agreement  with  that  obtained  by  Sommerfeld  and 
Debye.  The  method  they  used  involved  the  solution  of  the  equations 
of  motion  by  the  method  of  the  separation  of  the  variables.  The 
appropriate  coordinates  are  polar  ones  about  an  axis  parallel  to 
the  field. 

If  we  try,  however,  to  calculate  directly  the  effect  of  the  field  by 


ON  THE  SERIES  SPECTRA  OF  THE  ELEMENTS  43 

means  of  the  frequency  condition  (4),  we  immediately  meet  with 
an  apparent  disagreement  which  for  some  time  was  regarded  as  a 
grave  difficulty  for  the  theory.    As  both  Sommerfeld  and  Debye 
have  pointed  out,  lines  are  not  observed  corresponding  to  every 
transition  between  the  stationary  states  included  in  the  formula. 
We  overcome  this  difficulty,  however,  as  soon  as  we  apply  the 
principle  of  correspondence.    If  we  consider  the  harmonic  com- 
ponents of  the  motion  we  obtain  a  simple  explanation  both  of  the 
non-occurrence  of  certain  transitions  and  of  the  observed  polariza- 
tion. In  the  magnetic  field  each  elliptic  harmonic  component  having 
the  frequency  TG>  splits  up  into  three  harmonic  components  owing 
to  the  uniform  rotation  of  the  orbit.    Of  these  one  is  rectilinear 
with  frequency  TO>  oscillating  parallel  to  the  magnetic  field,  and 
two  are  circular  with  frequencies  rco  +  ar  and  rw  —  a-  oscillating  in 
opposite  directions  in  a  plane  perpendicular  to  the  direction  of  the 
field.  Consequently  the  motion  represented  by  formula  (22)  contains 
no  components  for  which  K  is  numerically  greater  than  1,  in  contrast 
to  the  Stark  effect,  where  components  corresponding  to  all  values 
of  K  are  present.   Now  formula  (23)  again  applies  for  large  values 
of  n  and  k,  and  shows  the  asymptotic  agreement  between  the 
frequency  of  the  radiation  and  the  frequency  of  a  harmonic  com- 
ponent in  the  motion.    We  arrive,  therefore,  at  the  conclusion  that 
transitions  for  which  k  changes  by  more  than  unity  can  not  occur. 
The  argument  is  similar  to  that  by  which  transitions  between  two 
distinctive  states  of  a  Planck  oscillator  for  which  the  values  of  n 
in  (1)  differ  by  more  than  unity  are  excluded.    We  must  further 
conclude  that  the  various  possible  transitions  consist  of  two  types. 
For  the  one  type  corresponding  to  the  rectilinear  component,  k 
remains  unchanged,  and  in  the  emitted  radiation  which  possesses 
the  same  frequency  VQ  as  the  original  hydrogen  line,  the  electric 
vector  will  oscillate  parallel  with  the  field.    For  the  second  type, 
corresponding  to  the  circular  components,  k  will  increase  or  decrease 
by  unity,  and  the  radiation  viewed  in  the  direction  of  the  field  will 
be  circularly  polarized  and  have  frequencies  v0+  a  and  v0  —  cr  re- 
spectively.  These  results  agree  with  those  of  the  familiar  Lorentz 
theory.   The  similarity  in  the  two  theories  is  remarkable,  when  we 
recall  the  fundamental  difference  between  the  ideas  of  the  quantum 
theory  and  the  ordinary  theories  of  radiation. 


44  ON  THE  SERIES  SPECTRA  OF  THE  ELEMENTS 

Central  perturbations.  An  illustration  based  on  similar  con- 
siderations which  will  throw  light  upon  the  spectra  of  other  ele- 
ments consists  in  finding  the  effect  of  a  small  perturbing  field  of 
force  radially  symmetrical  with  respect  to  the  nucleus.  In  this  case 
neither  the  form  of  the  orbit  nor  the  position  of  its  plane  will 
change  with  time,  and  the  perturbing  effect  of  the  field  will  simply 
consist  of  a  uniform  rotation  of  the  major  axis  of  the  orbit.  The 
perturbations  are  periodic,  so  that  we  may  assume  that  to  each 
energy  value  of  a  stationary  state  of  the  unperturbed  system  there 
belongs  a  series  of  discrete  energy  values  of  the  perturbed  system, 
characterized  by  different  values  of  a  whole  number  k.  The  fre- 
quency a-  of  the  perturbations  is  equal  to  the  frequency  of  rotation 
of  the  major  axis.  For  a  given  law  of  force  for  the  perturbing 
field  we  find  that  a-  depends  both  on  the  major  axis  and  on  the 
excentricity.  The  change  in  the  energy  of  the  stationary  states, 
therefore,  will  not  be  given  by  an  expression  as  simple  as  the 
second  term  in  formula  (19),  but  will  be  a  function  of  k,  which  is 
different  for  different  fields.  It  is  possible,  however,  to  characterize 
by  one  and  the  same  condition  the  motion  in  the  stationary  states 
of  a  hydrogen  atom  which  is  perturbed  by  any  central  field.  In 
order  to  show  this  we  must  consider  more  closely  the  fixation  of 
the  motion  of  a  perturbed  hydrogen  atom. 

In  the  stationary  states  of  the  unperturbed  hydrogen  atom 
only  the  major  axis  of  the  orbit  is  to  be  regarded  as  fixed, 
while  the  excentricity  may  assume  any  value.  Since  the  change 
in  the  energy  of  the  atom  due  to  the  external  field  of  force  de- 
pends upon  the  form  and  position  of  its  orbit,  the  fixation  of  the 
energy  of  the  atom  in  the  presence  of  such  a  field  naturally 
involves  a  closer  determination  of  the  orbit  of  the  perturbed 
system. 

Consider,  for  the  sake  of  illustration,  the  change  in  the  hydrogen 
spectrum  due  to  the  presence  of  homogeneous  electric  and  mag- 
netic fields  which  was  described  by  equation  (19).  It  is  found  that 
this  energy  condition  can  be  given  a  simple  geometrical  inter- 
pretation. In  the  case  of  an  electric  field  the  distance  from  the 
nucleus  to  the  plane  in  which  the  centre  of  the  orbit  moves  deter- 
mines the  change  in  the  energy  of  the  system  due  to  the  presence 
of  the  field.  In  the  stationary  states  this  distance  is  simply  equal 


ON  THE  SERIES  SPECTRA  OF  THE  ELEMENTS  45 

k 

to  -  times  half  the  major  axis  of  the  orbit.  In  the  case  of  a  mag- 
netic field  it  is  found  that  the  quantity  which  determines  the  change 
of  energy  of  the  system  is  the  area  of  the  projection  of  the  orbit 
upon  a  plane  perpendicular  to  the  magnetic  force.  In  the  various 

k 
stationary  states  this  area  is  equal  to  -  times  the  area  of  a  circle 

whose  radius  is  equal  to  half  the  major  axis  of  the  orbit.  In  the 
case  of  a  perturbing  central  force  the  correspondence  between 
the  spectrum  and  the  motion  which  is  required  by  the  quantum 
theory  leads  now  to  the  simple  condition  that  in  the  stationary 
states  of  the  perturbed  system  the  minor  axis  of  the  rotating  orbit 

k 
is  simply  equal  to  -  times  the  major  axis.   This  condition  was  first 

derived  by  Sommerfeld  from  his  general  theory  for  the  determina- 
tion of  the  stationary  states  of  a  central  motion.  It  is  easily  shown 
that  this  fixation  of  the  value  of  the  minor  axis  is  equivalent  to 
the  statement  that  the  parameter  2p  of  the  elliptical  orbit  is  given 
by  an  expression  of  exactly  the  same  form  as  that  which  gives  the 
major  axis  2a  in  the  unperturbed  atom.  The  only  difference  from 
the  expression  for  2an  in  (17)  is  that  n  is  replaced  by  k,  so  that 
the  value  of  the  parameter  in  the  stationary  states  of  the  perturbed 
atom  is  given  by 

*»"»$£* <25> 

The  frequency  of  the  radiation  emitted  by  a  transition  between 
two  stationary  states  determined  in  this  way  for  which  n'  and  n"  are 
large  in  proportion  to  their  difference  is  given  by  an  expression 
which  is  the  same  as  that  in  equation  (23),  if  in  this  case  &>  is  the 
frequency  of  revolution  of  the  electron  in  the  slowly  rotating  orbit 
and  <r  represents  the  frequency  of  rotation  of  the  major  axis. 

Before  proceeding  further,  it  might  be  of  interest  to  note  that 
this  fixation  of  the  stationary  states  of  the  hydrogen  atom  perturbed 
by  external  electric  and  magnetic  forces  does  not  coincide  in  certain 
respects  with  the  theories  of  Sommerfeld,  Epstein  and  Debye. 
According  to  the  theory  of  conditionally  periodic  systems  the  sta- 
tionary states  for  a  system  of  three  degrees  of  freedom  will  in  general 
be  determined  by  three  conditions,  and  therefore  in  these  theories 


46  ON  THE  SERIES  SPECTRA  OF  THE  ELEMENTS 

each  state  is  characterized  by  three  whole  numbers.  This  would 
mean  that  the  stationary  states  of  the  perturbed  hydrogen  atom 
corresponding  to  a  certain  stationary  state  of  the  unperturbed 
hydrogen  atom,  fixed  by  one  condition,  should  be  subject  to  two 
further  conditions  and  should  therefore  be  characterized  by  two 
new  whole  numbers  in  addition  to  the  number  n.  But  the  per- 
turbations of  the  Keplerian  motion  are  simply  periodic  and  the 
energy  of  the  perturbed  atom  will  therefore  be  fixed  completely 
by  one  additional  condition.  The  introduction  of  a  second  condition 
will  add  nothing  further  to  the  explanation  of  the  phenomenon, 
since  with  the  appearance  of  new  perturbing  forces,  even  if 
these  are  too  small  noticeably  to  affect  the  observed  Zeeman  and 
Stark  effects,  the  forms  of  motion  characterized  by  such  a  condition 
may  be  entirely  changed.  This  is  completely  analogous  to  the 
fact  that  the  hydrogen  spectrum  as  it  is  usually  observed  is  not 
noticeably  affected  by  small  forces,  even  when  they  are  large  enough 
to  produce  a  great  change  in  the  form  and  position  of  the  orbit  of 
the  electron. 

Relativity  effect  on  hydrogen  lines.  Before  leaving  the  hydro- 
gen spectrum  I  shall  consider  briefly  the  effect  of  the  variation  of 
the  mass  of  the  electron  with  its  velocity.  In  the  preceding  sections 
I  have  described  how  external  fields  of  force  split  up  the  hydrogen 
lines  into  several  components,  but  it  should  be  noticed  that  these 
results  are  only  accurate  when  the  perturbations  are  large  in  com- 
parison with  the  small  deviations  from  a  pure  Keplerian  motion 
due  to  the  variation  of  the  mass  of  the  electron  with  its  velocity. 
When  the  variation  of  the  mass  is  taken  into  account  the  motion 
of  the  unperturbed  atom  will  not  be  exactly  periodic.  Instead  we 
obtain  a  motion  of  precisely  the  same  kind  as  that  occurring  in  the 
hydrogen  atom  perturbed  by  a  small  central  field.  According  to 
the  correspondence  principle  an  intimate  connection  is  to  be  ex- 
pected between  the  frequency  of  revolution  of  the  major  axis  of  the 
orbit  and  the  difference  of  the  frequencies  of  the  fine  structure 
components,  and  the  stationary  states  will  be  those  orbits  whose 
parameters  are  given  by  expression  (25).  If  we  now  consider  the 
effect  of  external  forces  upon  the  fine  structure  components  of  the 
hydrogen  lines  it  is  necessary  to  keep  in  mind  that  this  fixation  of 


ON  THE  SERIES  SPECTRA  OF  THE  ELEMENTS  47 

the  stationary  states  only  applies  to  the  unperturbed  hydrogen 
atom,  and  that,  as  mentioned,  the  orbits  in  these  states  are  in 
general  already  strongly  influenced  by  the  presence  of  external 
forces,  which  are  small  compared  with  those  with  which  we  are 
concerned  in  experiments  on  the  Stark  and  Zeeman  effects.  In 
general  the  presence  of  such  forces  will  lead  to  a  great  complexity 
of  perturbations,  and  the  atom  will  no  longer  possess  a  group  of 
sharply  defined  stationary  states.  The  fine  structure  components 
of  a  given  hydrogen  line  will  therefore  become  diffuse  and  merged 
together.  There  are,  however,  several  important  cases  where  this 
does  not  happen  on  account  of  the  simple  character  of  the  per- 
turbations. The  simplest  example  is  a  hydrogen  atom  perturbed 
by  a  central  force  acting  from  the  nucleus.  In  this  case  it  is  evident 
that  the  motion  of  the  system  will  retain  its  centrally  symmetrical 
character,  and  that  the  perturbed  motion  will  differ  from  the  un- 
perturbed motion  only  in  that  the  frequency  of  rotation  of  the  major 
axis  will  be  different  for  different  values  of  this  axis  and  of  the 
parameter.  This  point  is  of  importance  in  the  theory  of  the 
spectra  of  elements  of  higher  atomic  number,  since,  as  we  shall  see, 
the  effect  of  the  forces  originating  from  the  inner  electrons  may 
to  a  first  approximation  be  compared  with  that  of  a  perturbing 
central  field.  We  can  not  therefore  expect  these  spectra  to  exhibit 
a  separate  effect  due  to  the  variation  of  the  mass  of  the  electron 
of  the  same  kind  as  that  found  in  the  case  of  the  hydrogen  lines. 
This  variation  will  not  give  rise  to  a  splitting  up  into  separate 
components  but  only  to  small  displacements  in  the  position  of  the 
various  lines. 

We  obtain  still  another  simple  example  in  which  the  hydrogen 
atom  possesses  sharp  stationary  states,  although  the  change  of  mass 
of  the  electron  is  considered,  if  we  take  an  atom  subject  to  a  homo- 
geneous magnetic  field.  The  effect  of  such  a  field  will  consist  in 
the  superposition  of  a  rotation  of  the  entire  system  about  an  axis 
through  the  nucleus  and  parallel  with  the  magnetic  force.  It  follows 
immediately  from  this  result  according  to  the  principle  of  corre- 
spondence that  each  fine  structure  component  must  be  expected 
to  split  up  into  a  normal  Zeeman  effect  (Lorentz  triplet).  The 
problem  may  also  be  solved  by  means  of  the  theory  of  conditionally 
periodic  systems,  since  the  equations  of  motion  in  the  presence 


48  ON  THE  SERIES  SPECTRA  OF  THE  ELEMENTS 

of  a  magnetic  field,  even  when  the  change  in  the  mass  is  con- 
sidered, will  allow  of  a  separation  of  the  variables  using  polar 
coordinates  in  space.  This  has  been  pointed  out  by  Sommerfeld 
and  Debye. 

A  more  complicated  case  arises  when  the  atom  is  exposed  to  a 
homogeneous  electric  field  which  is  not  so  strong  that  the  effect 
due  to  the  change  in  the  mass  may  be  neglected.  In  this  case  there 
is  no  system  of  coordinates  by  which  the  equations  of  motion  can 
be  solved  by  separation  of  the  variables,  and  the  problem,  therefore, 
can  not  be  treated  by  the  theory  of  the  stationary  states  of  con- 
ditionally periodic  systems.  A  closer  investigation  of  the  perturba- 
tions, however,  shows  them  to  be  of  such  a  character  that  the  motion 
of  the  electrons  may  be  decomposed  into  a  number  of  separate  har- 
monic components.  These  fall  into  two  groups  for  which  the  direc- 
tion of  oscillation  is  either  parallel  with  or  perpendicular  to  the 
field.  According  to  the  principle  of  correspondence,  therefore,  we 
must  expect  that  also  in  this  case  in  the  presence  of  the  field  each 
hydrogen  line  will  consist  of  a  number  of  sharp,  polarized  compo- 
nents. In  fact  by  means  of  the  principles  I  have  described,  it  is 
possible  to  give  a  unique  fixation  of  the  stationary  states.  The 
problem  of  the  effect  of  a  homogeneous  electric  field  upon  the  fine 
structure  components  of  the  hydrogen  lines  has  been  treated  in 
detail  from  this  point  of  view  by  Kramers  in  a  paper  which  will 
soon  be  published.  In  this  paper  it  will  be  shown  how  it  appears 
possible  to  predict  in  detail  the  manner  in  which  the  fine  structure 
of  the  hydrogen  lines  gradually  changes  into  the  ordinary  Stark 
effect  as  the  electric  intensity  increases. 

Theory  of  series  spectra.  Let  us  now  turn  our  attention  once 
more  to  the  problem  of  the  series  spectra  of  elements  of  higher 
atomic  number.  The  general  appearance  of  the  Rydberg  constant 
in  these  spectra  is  to  be  explained  by  assuming  that  the  atom  is 
neutral  and  that  one 'electron  revolves  in  an  orbit  the  dimensions 
of  which  are  large  in  comparison  with  the  distance  of  the  inner  elec- 
trons from  the  nucleus.  In  a  certain  sense,  therefore,  the  motion  of 
the  outer  electron  may  be  compared  with  *he  motion  of  the  electron 
of  the  hydrogen  atom  perturbed  by  external  forces,  and  the  appear- 
ance of  the  various  series  in  the  spectra  of  the  other  elements  is 


ON  THE  SERIES  SPECTRA  OF  THE  ELEMENTS  49 

from  this  point  of  view  to  be  regarded  as  analogous  to  the  splitting 
up  of  the  hydrogen  lines  into  components  on  account  of  such  forces. 
In  his  theory  of  the  structure  of  series  spectra  of  the  type  ex- 
hibited by  the  alkali  metals,  Sommerfeld  has  made  the  assumption 
that  the  orbit  of  the  outer  electron  to  a  first  approximation  pos- 
sesses the  same  character  as  that  produced  by  a  simple  perturbing 
central  field  whose  intensity  diminishes  rapidly  with  increasing 
distance  from  the  nucleus.  He  fixed  the  motion  of  the  external 
electron  by  means  of  his  general  theory  for  the  fixation  of  the 
stationary  states  of  a  central  motion.  The  application  of  this 
method  depends  on  the  possibility  of  separating  the  variables  in 
the  equations  of  motion.  In  this  manner  Sommerfeld  was  able  to 
calculate  a  number  of  energy  values  which  can  be  arranged  in  rows 
just  like  the  empirical  spectral  terms  shown  in  the  diagram  of  the 
sodium  spectrum  (p.  30).  The  states  grouped  together  by  Som- 
merfeld in  the  separate  rows  are  exactly  those  which  were  charac- 
terized by  one  and  the  same  value  of  k  in  our  investigation  of  the 
hydrogen  atom  perturbed  by  a  central  force.  The  states  in  the 
first  row  of  the  figure  (row  S)  correspond  to  the  value  k  =  I,  those 
of  the  second  row  (P)  correspond  to  k  =  2,  etc.  The  states  corre- 
sponding to  one  and  the  same  value  of  n  are  connected  by  dotted 
lines  which  are  continued  so  that  their  vertical  asymptotes  corre- 
spond to  the  energy  value  of  the  stationary  states  of  the  hydrogen 
atom.  The  fact  that  for  a  constant  n  and  increasing  values  of  k 
the  energy  values  approach  the  corresponding  values  for  the  unper- 
turbed hydrogen  atom  is  immediately  evident  from  the  theory 
since  the  outer  electron,  for  large  values  of  the  parameter  of  its 
orbit,  remains  at  a  great  distance  from  the  inner  system  during  the 
whole  revolution.  The  orbit  will  become  almost  elliptical  and  the 
period  of  rotation  of  the  major  axis  will  be  very  large.  It  can  be 
seen,  therefore,  that  the  effect  of  the  inner  system  on  the  energy 
necessary  to  remove  this  electron  from  the  atom  must  become  less 
for  increasing  values  of  k. 

These  beautiful  results  suggest  the  possibility  of  finding  laws  of 
orce  for  the  perturbing  central  field  which  would  account  for  the 
spectra  observed.  Although  Sommerfeld  in  this  way  has  in  fact 
succeeded  in  deriving  formulae  for  the  spectral  terms  which  vary 
with  n  for  a  constant  k  in  agreement  with  Rydberg's  formulae,  it 


50  ON  THE  SERIES  SPECTRA  OF  THE  ELEMENTS 

has  not  been  possible  to  explain  the  simultaneous  variation  with 
both  k  and  n  in  any  actual  case.  This  is  not  surprising,  since  it  is 
to  be  anticipated  that  the  effect  of  the  inner  electrons  on  the  spec- 
trum could  not  be  accounted  for  in  such  a  simple  manner.  Further 
consideration  shows  that  it  is  necessary  to  consider  not  only  the 
forces  which  originate  from  the  inner  electrons  but  also  to  consider 
the  effect  of  the  presence  of  the  outer  electron  upon  the  motion  of 
the  inner  electrons. 

Before  considering  the  series  spectra  of  elements  of  low  atomic 
number  I  shall  point  out  how  the  occurrence  or  non-occurrence  of 
certain  transitions  can  be  shown  by  the  correspondence  principle 
to  furnish  convincing  evidence  in  favour  of  Sommerfeld's  assump- 
tion about  the  orbit  of  the  outer  electron.  For  this  purpose  we 
must  describe  the  motion  of  the  outer  electron  in  terms  of  its  har- 
monic components.  This  is  easily  performed  if  we  assume  that  the 
presence  of  the  inner  electrons  simply  produces  a  uniform  rotation 
of  the  orbit  of  the  outer  electron  in  its  plane.  On  account  of  this 
rotation,  the  frequency  of  which  we  will  denote  by  cr,  two  circular 
rotations  with  the  periods  rto  +  tr  and  ro>  —  a-  will  appear  in  the 
motion  of  the  perturbed  electron,  instead  of  each  of  the  harmonic 
elliptical  components  with  a  period  r&>  in  the  unperturbed  motion. 
The  decomposition  of  the  perturbed  motion  into  harmonic  compo- 
nents consequently  will  again  be  represented  by  a  formula  of  the 
type  (22),  in  which  only  such  terms  appear  for  which  K  is  equal 
to .+  1  or  —  1.  Since  the  frequency  of  the  emitted  radiation  in  the 
regions  where  n  and  k  are  large  is  again  given  by  the  asymptotic 
formula  (23),  we  at  once  deduce  from  the  correspondence  principle 
that  the  only  transitions  which  can  take  place  are  those  for  which 
the  values  of  k  differ  by  unity.  A  glance  at  the  figure  for  the  sodium 
spectrum  shows  that  this  agrees  exactly  with  the  experimental 
results.  This  fact  is  all  the  more  remarkable,  since  in  Sommerfeld's 
theory  the  arrangement  of  the  energy  values  of  the  stationary 
states  in  rows  has  no  special  relation  to  the  possibility  of  transition 
between  these  states. 

Correspondence  principle  and  conservation  of  angular  mo- 
mentum. Besides  these  results  the  correspondence  principle  sug- 
gests that  the  radiation  emitted  by  the  perturbed  atom  must 


ON  THE  SERIES  SPECTRA  OF  THE  ELEMENTS  51 

exhibit  circular  polarization.  On  account  of  the  indeterminateness 
of  the  plane  of  the  orbit,  however,  this  polarization  can  not  be 
directly  observed.  The  assumption  of  such  a  polarization  is  a  matter 
of  particular  interest  for  the  theory  of  radiation  emission.  On 
account  of  the  general  correspondence  between  the  spectrum  of 
an  atom  and  the  decomposition  of  its  motion  into  harmonic 
components,  we  are  led  to  compare  the  radiation  emitted  during 
the  transition  between  two  stationary  states  with  the  radia- 
tion which  would  be  emitted  by  a  harmonically  oscillating 
electron  on  the  basis  of  the  classical  electrodynamics.  In  par- 
ticular the  radiation  emitted  according  to  the  classical  theory 
by  an  electron  revolving  in  a  circular  orbit  possesses  an  angular 
momentum  and  the  energy  &.E  and  the  angular  momentum  AP  of 
the  radiation  emitted  during  a  certain  time  are  connected  by  the 
relation 

A^=27ro>.AP  ......................  (26) 

Here  CD  represents  the  frequency  of  revolution  of  the  electron, 
and  according  to  the  classical  theory  this  is  equal  to  the  frequency 
v  of  the  radiation.  If  we  now  assume  that  the  total  energy  emitted 
is  equal  to  hv  we  obtain  for  the  total  angular  momentum  of  the 
radiation 


It  is  extremely  interesting  to  note  that  this  expression  is  equal 
to  the  change  in  the  angular  momentum  which  the  atom  suffers  in 
a  transition  where  k  varies  by  unity.  For  in  Sommerfeld's  theory 
the  general  condition  for  the  fixation  of  the  stationary  states  of  a 
central  system,  which  in  the  special  case  of  an  approximately 
Keplerian  motion  is  equivalent  to  the  relation  (25),  asserts  that 
the  angular  momentum  of  the  system  must  be  equal  to  a  whole 

multiple  of  ~-  ,  a  condition  which  may  be  written  in  our  notation 


We  see,  therefore,  that  this  condition  has  obtained  direct  support 
from  a  simple  consideration  of  the  conservation  of  angular  momen- 
tum during  the  emission  of  the  radiation.  I  wish  to  emphasize 
that  this  equation  is  to  be  regarded  as  a  rational  generalization  of 

4—2 


52  ON  THE  SERIES  SPECTRA  OF  THE  ELEMENTS 

Planck's  original  statement  about  the  distinctive  states  of  a  har- 
monic oscillator.  It  may  be  of  interest  to  recall  that  the  possible 
significance  of  the  angular  momentum  in  applications  of  the 
quantum  theory  to  atomic  processes  was  first  pointed  out  by 
Nicholson  on  the  basis  of  the  fact  that  for  a  circular  motion  the 
angular  momentum  is  simply  proportional  to  the  ratio  of  the 
kinetic  energy  to  the  frequency  of  revolution. 

In  a  previous  paper  which  I  presented  to  the  Copenhagen 
Academy  I  pointed  out  that  these  results  confirm  the  conclusions 
obtained  by  the  application  of  the  correspondence  principle  to 
atomic  systems  possessing  radial  or  axial  symmetry.  Rubinowicz 
has  independently  indicated  the  conclusions  which  may  be  obtained 
directly  from  a  consideration  of  conservation  of  angular  momentum 
during  the  radiation  process.  In  this  way  he  has  obtained  several 
of  our  results  concerning  the  various  types  of  possible  transitions 
and  the  polarization  of  the  emitted  radiation.  Even  for  systems 
possessing  radial  or  axial  symmetry,  however,  the  conclusions  which 
we  can  draw  by  means  of  the  correspondence  principle  are  of  a 
more  detailed  character  than  can  be  obtained  solely  from  a  con- 
sideration of  the  conservation  of  angular  momentum.  For  example, 
in  the  case  of  the  hydrogen  atom  perturbed  by  a  central  force  we 
can  only  conclude  that  k  can  not  change  by  more  than  unity,  while 
the  correspondence  principle  requires  that  k  shall  vary  by  unity 
for  every  possible  transition  and  that  its  value  cannot  remain  un- 
changed. Further,  this  principle  enables  us  not  only  to  exclude 
certain  transitions  as  being  impossible — and  can  from  this  point  of 
view  be  considered  as  a  "selection  principle" — but  it  also  enables 
us  to  draw  conclusions  about  the  relative  probabilities  of  the  various 
possible  types  of  transitions  from  the  values  of  the  amplitudes  of 
the  harmonic  components.  In  the  present  case,  for  example,  the 
fact  that  the  amplitudes  of  those  circular  components  which  rotate 
in  the  same  sense  as  the  electron  are  in  general  greater  than  the 
amplitudes  of  those  which  rotate  in  the  opposite  sense  leads  us  to 
expect  that  lines  corresponding  to  transitions  for  which  k  decreases 
by  unity  will  in  general  possess  greater  intensity  than  lines  during 
the  emission  of  which  k  increases  by  unity.  Simple  considerations 
like  this,  however,  apply  only  to  spectral  lines  corresponding  to 
transitions  from  one  and  the  same  stationary  state.  In  other 


ON  THE  SERIES  SPECTRA  OF  THE  ELEMENTS  53 

cases  when  we  wish  to  estimate  the  relative  intensities  of  two 
spectral  lines  it  is  clearly  necessary  to  take  into  consideration  the 
relative  number  of  atoms  which  are  present  in  each  of  the  two 
stationary  states  from  which  the  transitions  start.  While  the  in- 
tensity naturally  can  not  depend  upon  the  number  of  atoms  in  the 
final  state,  it  is  to  be  noticed,  however,  that  in  estimating  the 
probability  of  a  transition  between  two  stationary  states  it  is  neces- 
sary to  consider  the  character  of  the  motion  in  the  final  as  well  as 
in  the  initial  state,  since  the  values  of  the  amplitudes  of  the  com- 
ponents of  oscillation  of  both  states  are  to  be  regarded  as  decisive 
for  the  probability. 

To  show  how  this  method  can  be  applied  I  shall  return  for  a 
moment  to  the  problem  which  I  mentioned  in  connection  with 
Strutt's  experiment  on  the  resonance  radiation  of  sodium  vapour. 
This  involved  the  discussion  of  the  relative  probability  of  the  various 
possible  transitions  which  can  start  from  that  state  corresponding 
to  the  second  term  in  the  second  row  of  the  figure  on  p.  30.  These 
were  transitions  to  the  first  and  second  states  in  the  first  row  and 
to  the  first  state  in  the  third  row,  and  the  results  of  experiment 
indicate,  as  we  saw,  that  the  probability  is  greatest  for  the  second 
transitions.  These  transitions  correspond  to  those  harmonic  com- 
ponents having  frequencies  2<w  +  cr,  w  +  a  and  <r,  and  it  is  seen 
that  only  for  the  second  transition  do  the  amplitudes  of  the  corre- 
sponding harmonic  component  differ  from  zero  in  the  initial  'as 
well  as  in  the  final  state.  [In  the  next  essay  the  reader  will  find 
that  the  values  of  quantum  number  n  assigned  in  fig.  1  to  the 
various  stationary  states  must  be  altered.  While  this  correction 
in  no  way  influences  the  other  conclusions  in  this  essay  it  involves 
that  the  reasoning  in  this  passage  can  not  be  maintained.] 

I  have  shown  how  the  correspondence  between  the  spectrum  of 
an  element  and  the  motion  of  the  atom  enables  us  to  understand 
the  limitations  in  the  direct  application  of  the  combination  principle 
in  the  prediction  of  spectral  lines.  The  same  ideas  give  an  imme- 
diate explanation  of  the  interesting  discovery  made  in  recent  years 
by  Stark  and  his  collaborators,  that  certain  new  series  of  combina- 
tion lines  appear  with  considerable  intensity  when  the  radiating 
atoms  are  subject  to  a  strong  external  electric  field.  This  phe- 
nomenon is  entirely  analogous  to  the  appearance  of  the  so-called 


54  ON  THE  SERIES  SPECTRA  OF  THE  ELEMENTS 

combination  tones  in  acoustics.  It  is  due  to  the  fact  that  the 
perturbation  of  the  motion  will  not  only  consist  in  an  effect  upon 
the  components  originally  present,  but  in  addition  will  give  rise  to 
new  components.  The  frequencies  of  these  new  components  may  be 
To>  +  K(T,  where  K  is  different  from  +  1.  According  to  the  correspond- 
ence principle  we  must  therefore  expect  that  the  electric  field  will 
not  only  influence  the  lines  appearing  under  ordinary  circumstances, 
but  that  it  will  also  render  possible  new  types  of  transitions  which 
give  rise  to  the  "new"  combination  lines  observed.  From  an  esti- 
mate of  the  amplitudes  of  the  particular  components  in  the  initial 
and  final  states  it  has  even  been  found  possible  to  account  for  the 
varying  facility  with  which  the  new  lines  are  brought  up  by  the 
external  field. 

The  general  problem  of  the  effect  of  an  electric  field  on  the  spectra 
of  elements  of  higher  atomic  number  differs  essentially  from  the 
simple  Stark  effect  of  the  hydrogen  lines,  since  we  are  here  con- 
cerned not  with  the  perturbation  of  a  purely  periodic  system,  but 
with  the  effect  of  the  field  on  a  periodic  motion  already  subject  to 
a  perturbation.  The  problem  to  a  certain  extent  resembles  the 
effect  of  a  weak  electric  force  on  the  fine  structure  components  of 
the  hydrogen  atom.  In  much  the  same  way  the  effect  of  an  electric 
field  upon  the  series  spectra  of  the  elements  may  be  treated  directly 
by  investigating  the  perturbations  of  the  external  electron.  A 
continuation  of  my  paper  in  the  Transactions  of  the  Copenhagen 
Academy  will  soon  appear  in  which  I  shall  show  how  this  method 
enables  us  to  understand  the  interesting  observations  Stark  and 
others  have  made  in  this  field. 

The  spectra  of  helium  and  lithium.  We  see  that  it  has  been 
possible  to  obtain  a  certain  general  insight  into  the  origin  of  the 
series  spectra  of  a  type  like  that  of  sodium.  The  difficulties  en- 
countered in  an  attempt  to  give  a  detailed  explanation  of  the 
spectrum  of  a  particular  element,  however,  become  very  serious, 
even  when  we  consider  the  spectrum  of  helium  whose  neutral  atom 
contains  only  two  electrons.  The  spectrum  of  this  element  has  a 
simple  structure  in  that  it  consists  of  single  lines  or  at  any  rate  of 
double  lines  whose  components  are  very  close  together.  We  find, 
however,  that  the  lines  fall  into  two  groups  each  of  which  can  be 


ON  THE  SERIES  SPECTRA  OF  THE  ELEMENTS  55 

described  by  a  formula  of  the  type  (14).  These  are  usually  called 
the  (ortho)  helium  and  parhelium  spectra.  While  the  latter  con- 
sists of  simple  lines,  the  former  possesses  narrow  doublets.  The 
discovery  that  helium,  as  opposed  to  the  alkali  metals,  possesses 
two  complete  spectra  of  the  Rydberg  type  which  do  not  exhibit  any 
mutual  combinations  was  so  surprising  that  at  times  there  has  been 
a  tendency  to  believe  that  helium  consisted  of  two  elements.  This 
way  out  of  the  difficulty  is  no  longer  open,  since  there  is  no  room 
for  another  element  in  this  region  of  the  periodic  system,  or  more 
correctly  expressed,  for  an  element  possessing  a  new  spectrum.  The 
existence  of  the  two  spectra  can,  however,  be  traced  back  to  the  fact 
that  in  the  stationary  states  corresponding  to  the  series  spectra  we 
have  to  do  with  a  system  possessing  only  one  inner  electron  and  in 
consequence  the  motion  of  the  inner  system,  in  the  absence  of  the 
outer  electron,  will  be  simply  periodic  and  therefore  easily  perturbed 
by  external  forces. 

In  order  to  illustrate  this  point  we  shall  have  to  consider  more 
carefully  the  stationary  states  connected  with  the  origin  of  a  series 
spectrum.  We  must  assume  that  in  these  states  one  electron  De- 
volves in  an  orbit  outside  the  nucleus  and  the  other  electrons.  We 
might  now  suppose  that  in  general  a  number  of  different  groups  of 
such  states  might  exist,  each  group  corresponding  to  a  different 
stationary  state  of  the  inner  system  considered  by  itself.  Further 
consideration  shows,  however,  that  under  the  usual  conditions  of 
excitation  those  groups  have  by  far  the  greatest  probability  for  which 
the  motion  of  the  inner  electrons  corresponds  to  the  "normal"  state 
of  the  inner  system,  i.e.  to  that  stationary  state  having  the  least 
energy.  Further  the  energy  required  to  transfer  the  inner  system 
from  its  normal  state  to  another  stationary  state  is  in  general  very 
large  compared  with  the  energy  which  is  necessary  to  transfer  an 
electron  from  the  normal  state  of  the  neutral  atom  to  a  stationary 
orbit  of  greater  dimensions.  Lastly  the  inner  system  is  in  general 
capable  of  a  permanent  existence  only  in  its  normal  state,  Now, 
the  configuration  of  an  atomic  system  in  its  stationary  states  and 
also  in  the  normal  state  will,  in  general,  be  completely  determined. 
We  may  therefore  expect  that  the  inner  system  under  the  influence 
of  the  forces  arising  from  the  presence  of  the  outer  electron  can  in 
the  course  of  time  suffer  only  small  changes.  For  this  reason  we 


56  ON  THE  SERIES  SPECTRA  OF  THE  ELEMENTS 

must  assume  that  the  influence  of  the  inner  system  upon  the  motion 
of  the  external  electron  will,  in  general,  be  of  the  same  character 
as  the  perturbations  produced  by  a  constant  external  field  upon 
the  motion  of  the  electron  in  the  hydrogen  atom.  We  must  there- 
fore expect  a  spectrum  consisting  of  an  ensemble  of  spectral  terms, 
which  in  general  form  a  connected  group,  even  though  in  the 
absence  of  external  perturbing  forces  not  every  combination  actually 
occurs.  The  case  of  the  helium  spectrum,  however,  is  quite  different 
since  here  the  inner  system  contains  only  one  electron  the  motion 
of  which  in  the  absence  of  the  external  electron  is  simple  periodic 
provided  the  small  changes  due  to  the  variation  in  the  mass  of  the 
electron  with  its  velocity  are  neglected.  For  this  reason  the  form  of 
the  orbit  in  the  stationary  states  of  the  inner  system  considered  by 
itself  will  not  be  determined.  In  other  words,  the  stability  of  the 
orbit  is  so  slight,  even  if  the  variation  in  the  mass  is  taken  into 
account,  that  small  external  forces  are  in  a  position  to  change  the 
excentricity  in  the  course  of  time  to  a  finite  extent.  In  this  case, 
therefore,  it  is  possible  to  have  several  groups  of  stationary  states, 
for  which  the  energy  of  the  inner  system  is  approximately  the  same 
while  the  form  of  the  orbit  of  the  inner  electron  and  its  position 
relative  to  the  motion  of  the  other  electrons  are  so  essentially 
different,  that  no  transitions  between  the  states  of  different  groups 
can  occur  even  in  the  presence  of  external  forces.  It  can  be  seen 
that  these  conclusions  summarize  the  experimental  observations 
on  the  helium  spectra. 

These  considerations  suggest  an  investigation  of  the  nature  of 
the  perturbations  in  the  orbit  of  the  inner  electron  of  the  helium 
atom,  due  to  the  presence  of  the  external  electron.  A  discussion 
of  the  helium  spectrum  from  this  point  of  view  has  recently  been 
given  by  Land6.  The  results  of  this  work  are  of  great  interest  par- 
ticularly in  the  demonstration  of  the  large  back  effect  on  the  outer 
electron  due  to  the  perturbations  of  the  inner  orbit  which  themselves 
arise  from  the  presence  of  the  outer  electron.  Nevertheless,  it  can 
scarcely  be  regarded  as  a  satisfactory  explanation  of  the  helium 
spectrum.  Apart  from  the  serious  objections  which  may  be  raised 
against  his  calculation  of  the  perturbations,  difficulties  arise  if  we 
try  to  apply  the  correspondence  principle  to  Lande's  results  in 
order  to  account  for  the  occurrence  of  two  distinct  spectra  showing 


ON  THE  SERIES  SPECTKA  OF  THE  ELEMENTS  57 

no  mutual  combinations.  To  explain  this  fact  it  seems  necessary 
to  base  the  discussion  on  a  more  thorough  investigation  of  the 
mutual  perturbations  of  the  outer  and  the  inner  orbits.  As  a 
result  of  these  perturbations  both  electrons  move  in  such  an 
extremely  complicated  way  that  the  stationary  states  can  not  be 
fixed  by  the  methods  developed  for  conditionally  periodic  systems. 
Dr  Kramers  and  I  have  in  the  last  few  years  been  engaged  in  such 
an  investigation,  and  in  an  address  on  atomic  problems  at  the 
meeting  of  the  Dutch  Congress  of  Natural  and  Medical  Sciences 
held  in  Leiden,  April  1919,  I  gave  a  short  communication  of  our 
results.  For  various  reasons  we  have  up  to  the  present  time  been 
prevented  from  publishing,  but  in  the  very  near  future  we  hope  to 
give  an  account  of  these  results  and  of  the  light  which  they  seem 
to  throw  upon  the  helium  spectrum. 

The  problem  presented  by  the  spectra  of  elements  of  higher 
atomic  number  is  simpler,  since  the  inner  system  is  better  defined 
in  its  normal  state.  On  the  other  hand  the  difficulty  of  the  mechani- 
cal problem  of  course  increases  with  the  number  of  the  particles  in 
the  atom.  We  obtain  an  example  of  this  in  the  case  of  lithium 
with  three  electrons.  The  differences  between  the  spectral  terms 
of  the  lithium  spectrum  and  the  corresponding  spectral  terms  of 
hydrogen  are  very  small  for  the  variable  term  of  the  principal  series 
(k  =  2)  and  for  the  diffuse  series  (k  =  3),  on  the  other  hand  it  is  very 
considerable  for  the  variable  term  of  the  sharp  series  (k=  1).  This 
is  very  different  from  what  would  be  expected  if  it  were  possible  to 
describe  the  effect  of  the  inner  electron  by  a  central  force  varying 
in  a  simple  manner  with  the  distance.  This  must  be  because  the 
parameter  of  the  orbit  of  the  outer  electron  in  the  stationary  states 
corresponding  to  the  terms  of  the  sharp  series  is  not  much  greater 
than  the  linear  dimensions  of  the  orbits  of  the  inner  electrons. 
According  to  theprinciple  of  correspondence  the  frequency  of  rotation 
of  the  major  axis  of  the  orbit  of  the  outer  electron  is  to  be  regarded 
as  a  measure  of  the  deviation  of  the  spectral  terms  from  the  corre- 
sponding hydrogen  terms.  In  order  to  calculate  this  frequency  it 
appears  necessary  to  consider  in  detail  the  mutual  effect  of  all  three 
electrons,  at  all  events  for  that  part  of  the  orbit  where  the  outer 
electron  is  very  close  to  the  other  two  electrons.  Even  if  we  assumed 
that  we  were  fully  acquainted  with  the  normal  state  of  the  inner 


58  ON  THE  SERIES  SPECTRA  OF  THE  ELEMENTS 

system  in  the  absence  of  the  outer  electron — which  would  be 
expected  to  be  similar  to  the  normal  state  of  the  neutral  helium 
atom — the  exact  calculation  of  this  mechanical  problem  would 
evidently  form  an  exceedingly  difficult  task. 

Complex  structure  of  series  lines.  For  the  spectra  of  elements 
of  still  higher  atomic  number  the  mechanical  problem  which  has  to 
be  solved  in  order  to  describe  the  motion  in  the  stationary  states 
becomes  still  more  difficult.  This  is  indicated  by  the  extraordinarily 
complicated  structure  of  many  of  the  observed  spectra.  The  fact  that 
the  series  spectra  of  the  alkali  metals,  which  possess  the  simplest 
structure,  consist  of  double  lines  whose  separation  increases  with 
the  atomic  number,  indicates  that  here  we  have  to  do  with  systems 
in  which  the  motion  of  the  outer  electron  possesses  in  general  a 
somewhat  more  complicated  character  than  that  of  a  simple  central 
motion.  This  gives  rise  to  a  more  complicated  ensemble  of  stationary 
states.  It  would,  however,  appear  that  in  the  sodium  atom  the  major 
axis  and  the  parameter  of  the  stationary  states  corresponding  to 
each  pair  of  spectral  terms  are  given  approximately  by  formulae 
(17)  and  (25).  This  is  indicated  not  only  by  the  similar  part  played 
by  the  two  states  in  the  experiments  on  the  resonance  radiation  of 
sodium  vapour,  but  is  also  shown  in  a  very  instructive  manner  by 
the  peculiar  effect  of  magnetic  fields  on  the  doublets.  For  small 
fields  each  component  splits  up  into  a  large  number  of  sharp  lines 
instead  of  into  the  normal  Lorentz  triplet.  With  increasing  field 
strength  Paschen  and  Back  found  that  this  anomalous  Zeeman  effect 
changed  into  the  normal  Lorentz  triplet  of  a  single  line  by  a  gradual 
fusion  of  the  components. 

This  effect  of  a  magnetic  field  upon  the  doublets  of  the  alkali 
spectrum  is  of  interest  in  showing  the  intimate  relation  of  the  com- 
ponents and  confirms  the  reality  of  the  simple  explanation  of  the 
general  structure  of  the  spectra  of  the  alkali  metals.  If  we  may 
again  here  rely  upon  the  correspondence  principle  we  have  unam- 
biguous evidence  that  the  effect  of  a  magnetic  field  on  the  motion 
of  the  electrons  simply  consists  in  the  superposition  of  a  uniform 
rotation  with  a  frequency  given  by  equation  (24)  as  in  the  case  of 
the  hydrogen  atom.  For  if  this  were  the  case  the  correspondence 
principle  would  indicate  under  all  conditions  a  normal  Zeeman  effect 


ON  THE  SERIES  SPECTRA  OF  THE  ELEMENTS  59 

for  each  component  of  the  doublets.  I  want  to  emphasize  that  the 
difference  between  the  simple  effect  of  a  magnetic  field,  which  the 
theory  predicts  for  the  fine  structure  of  components  of  the  hydrogen 
lines,  and  the  observed  effect  on  the  alkali  doublets  is  in  no  way  to 
be  considered  as  a  contradiction.  The  fine  structure  components 
are  not  analogous  to  the  individual  doublet  components,  but  each 
single  fine  structure  component  corresponds  to  the  ensemble  of 
components  (doublet,  triplet)  which  makes  up  one  of  the  series  lines 
in  Rydberg's  scheme.  The  occurrence  in  strong  fields  of  the  effect 
observed  by  Paschen  and  Back  must  therefore  be  regarded  as  a 
strong  support  for  the  theoretical  prediction  of  the  effect  of  a  mag- 
netic field  on  the  fine  structure  components  of  the  hydrogen  lines. 
It  does  not  appear  necessary  to  assume  the  "anomalous"  effect 
of  small  fields  on  the  doublet  components  to  be  due  to  a  failure  of 
the  ordinary  electrodynamical  laws  for  the  description  of  the  motion 
of  the  outer  electron,  but  rather  to  be  connected  with  an  effect  of 
the  magnetic  field  on  that  intimate  interaction  between  the  motion 
of  the  inner  and  outer  electrons  which  is  responsible  for  the  occur- 
rence of  the  doublets.  Such  a  view  is  probably  not  very  different 
from  the  "coupling  theory"  by  which  Voigt  was  able  to  account 
formally  for  the  details  of  the  anomalous  Zeeman  effect.  We  might 
even  expect  it  to  be  possible  to  construct  a  theory  of  these  effects 
which  would  exhibit  a  formal  analogy  with  the  Voigt  theory  similar 
to  that  between  the  quantum  theory  of  the  normal  Zeeman  effect  and 
the  theory  originally  developed  by  Lorentz.  Time  unfortunately 
does  not  permit  me  to  enter  further  into  this  interesting  problem,  so 
I  must  refer  you  to  the  continuation  of  my  paper  in  the  Transactions 
of  the  Copenhagen  Academy,  which  will  contain  a  general  discussion 
of  the  origin  of  series  spectra  and  of  the  effects  of  electric  and 
magnetic  fields. 

IV.   CONCLUSION 

In  this  lecture  I  have  purposely  not  considered  the  question  of 
the  structure  of  atoms  and  molecules  although  this  is  of  course  most 
intimately  connected  with  the  kind  of  spectral  theory  I  have  de- 
veloped. We  are  encouraged  to  use  results  obtained  from  the  spectra, 
since  even  the  simple  theory  of  the  hydrogen  spectrum  gives  a 
value  for  the  major  axis  of  the  orbit  of  the  electron  in  the  normal 


60  ON  THE  SERIES  SPECTRA  OF  THE  ELEMENTS 

state  (n  =  1)  of  the  same  order  of  magnitude  as  that  derived  from 
the  kinetic  theory  of  gases.  In  my  first  paper  on  the  subject  I 
attempted  to  sketch  a  theory  of  the  structure  of  atoms  and  of 
molecules  of  chemical  compounds.  This  theory  was  based  on  a 
simple  generalization  of  the  results  for  the  stationary  states  of  the 
hydrogen  atom.  In  several  respects  the  theory  was  supported  by 
experiment,  especially  in  the  general  way  in  which  the  properties 
of  the  elements  change  with  increasing  atomic  number,  shown  most 
clearly  by  Moseley's  results.  I  should  like,  however,  to  use  this 
occasion  to  state,  that  in  view  of  the  recent  development  of  the 
quantum  theory,  many  of  the  special  assumptions  will  certainly  have 
to  be  changed  in  detail  This  has  become  clear  from  various  sides 
by  the  lack  of  agreement  of  the  theory  with  experiment.  It  appears 
no  longer  possible  to  justify  the  assumption  that  in  the  normal 
states  the  electrons  move  in  orbits  of  special  geometrical  simplicity, 
like  "electronic  rings."  Considerations  relating  to  the  stability  of 
atoms  and  molecules  against  external  influences  and  concerning  the 
possibility  of  the  formation  of  an  atom  by  successive  addition  of 
the  individual  electrons  compel  us  to  claim,  first  that  the  con- 
figurations of  electrons  are  not  only  in  mechanical  equilibrium 
but  also  possess  a  certain  stability  in  the  sense  required  by 
ordinary  mechanics,  and  secondly  that  the  configurations  employed 
must  be  of  such  a  nature  that  transitions  to  these  from  other 
stationary  states  of  the  atom  are  possible.  These  requirements  are 
not  in  general  fulfilled  by  such  simple  configurations  as  electronic 
rings  and  they  force  us  to  look  about  for  possibilities  of  more  com- 
plicated motions.  It  will  not  be  possible  here  to  consider  further 
these  still  open  questions  and  I  must  content  myself  by  referring 
to  the  discussion  in  my  forthcoming  paper.  In  closing,  however, 
I  should  like  to  emphasize  once  more  that  in  this  lecture  I  have 
only  intended  to  bring  out  certain  general  points  of  view  lying  at 
the  basis  of  the  spectral  theory.  In  particular  it  was  my  intention 
to  show  that,  in  spite  of  the  fundamental  differences  between  these 
points  of  view  and  the  ordinary  conceptions  of  the  phenomena  of 
radiation,  it  still  appears  possible  on  the  basis  of  the  general  corre- 
spondence between  the  spectrum  and  the  motion  in  the  atom  to 
employ  these  conceptions  in  a  certain  sense  as  guides  in  the  investi- 
gation of  the  spectra. 


ESSAY  III* 

THE  STRUCTURE  OF  THE  ATOM  AND  THE  PHYSICAL 

AND  CHEMICAL  PROPERTIES  OF  THE  ELEMENTS 

I.    PRELIMINARY 

In  an  address  which  I  delivered  to  you  about  a  year  ago  I 
described  the  main  features  of  a  theory  of  atomic  structure  which 
I  shall  attempt  to  develop  this  evening.  In  the  meantime  this 
theory  has  assumed  more  definite  form,  and  in  two  recent  letters 
to  Nature  I  have  given  a  somewhat  further  sketch  of  the  de- 
velopment f.  The  results  which  I  am  about  to  present  to  you  are 
of  no  final  character;  but  I  hope  to  be  able  to  show  you  how  this 
view  renders  a  correlation  of  the  various  properties  of  the  elements 
in  such  a  way,  that  we  avoid  the  difficulties  which  previously 
appeared  to  stand  in  the  way  of  a  simple  and  consistent  explanation. 
Before  proceeding,  however,  I  must  ask  your  forbearance  if  initially 
I  deal  with  matters  already  known  to  you,  but  in  order  to  intro- 
duce you  to  the  subject  it  will  first  be  necessary  to  give  a  brief 
description  of  the  most  important  results  which  have  been  obtained 
in  recent  years  in  connection  with  the  work  on  atomic  structure. 

The  nuclear  atom.  The  conception  of  atomic  structure  which 
will  form  the  basis  of  all  the  following  remarks  is  the  so-called 
nuclear  atom  according  to  which  an  atom  is  assumed  to  consist  of 
a  nucleus  surrounded  by  a  number  of  electrons  whose  distances 
from  one  another  and  from  the  nucleus  are  very  large  compared 
to  the  dimensions  of  the  particles  themselves.  The  nucleus 
possesses  almost  the  entire  mass  of  the  atom  and  has  a  positive 
charge  of  such  a  magnitude  that  the  number  of  electrons  in  a 
neutral  atom  is  equal  to  the  number  of  the  element  in  the  periodic 
system,  the  so-called  atomic  number.  This  idea  of  the  atom,  which 
is  due  principally  to  Rutherford's  fundamental  researches  on  radio- 
active substances,  exhibits  extremely  simple  features,  but  just  this 
simplicity  appears  at  first  sight  to  present  difficulties  in  explaining 
the  properties  of  the  elements.  When  we  treat  this  question  on 

*  Address  delivered  before  a  joint  meeting  of  the  Physical  and  Chemical 
Societies  in  Copenhagen,  October  18,  1921. 

t  Xature,  March  24,  and  October  13,  1921. 


62         THE  STRUCTURE  OF  THE  ATOM  AND  THE 

the  basis  of  the  ordinary  mechanical  and  electrodynamical  theories 
it  is  impossible  to  find  a  starting  point  for  an  explanation  of  the 
marked  properties  exhibited  by  the  various  elements,  indeed  not 
even  of  their  permanency.  On  the  one  hand  the  particles  of  the 
atom  apparently  could  not  be  at  rest  in  a  state  of  stable  equilibrium, 
and  on  the  other  hand  we  should  have  to  expect  that  every  motion 
which  might  be  present  would  give  rise  to  the  emission  of  electro- 
magnetic radiation  which  would  not  cease  until  all  the  energy  of 
the  system  had  been  emitted  and  all  the  electrons  had  fallen  into 
the  nucleus.  A  method  of  escaping  from  these  difficulties  has  now 
been  found  in  the  application  of  ideas  belonging  to  the  quantum 
theory,  the  basis  of  which  was  laid  by  Planck  in  his  celebrated 
work  on  the  law  of  temperature  radiation.  This  represented  a 
radical  departure  from  previous  conceptions  since  it  was  the  first 
instance  in  which  the  assumption  of  a  discontinuity  was  employed 
in  the  formulation  of  the  general  laws  of  nature. 

The  postulates  of  the  quantum  theory.  The  quantum  theory 
in  the  form  in  which  it  has  been  applied  to  the  problems  of  atomic 
structure  rests  upon  two  postulates  which  have  a  direct  bearing 
on  the  difficulties  mentioned  above.  According  to  the  first  postu- 
late there  are  certain  states  in  which  the  atom  can  exist  without 
emitting  radiation,  although  the  particles  are  supposed  to  have  an 
accelerated  motion  relative  to  one  another.  These  stationary  states 
are,  in  addition,  supposed  to  possess  a  peculiar  kind  of  stability,  so 
that  it  is  impossible  either  to  add  energy  to  or  remove  energy  from 
the  atom  except  by  a  process  involving  a  transition  of  the  atom 
into  another  of  these  states.  According  to  the  second  postulate 
each  emission  of  radiation  from  the  atom  resulting  from  such  a 
transition  always  consists  of  a  train  of  purely  harmonic  waves. 
The  frequency  of  these  waves  does  not  depend  directly  upon  the 
motion  of  the  atom,  but  is  determined  by  a  frequency  relation, 
according  to  which  the  frequency  multiplied  by  the  universal  con- 
stant introduced  by  Planck  is  equal  to  the  total  energy  emitted 
during  the  process.  For  a  transition  between  two  stationary  states 
for  which  the  values  of  the  energy  of  the  atom  before  and  after  the 
emission  of  radiation  are  E'  and  E"  respectively,  we  have  therefore 

hv  =  E'-E",     (1) 


PHYSICAL  AND  CHEMICAL  PROPERTIES  OF  THE  ELEMENTS       63 

where  h  is  Planck's  constant  and  v  is  the  frequency  of  the  emitted 
radiation.  Time  does  not  permit  me  to  give  a  systematic  survey 
of  the  quantum  theory,  the  recent  development  of  which  has  gone 
hand  in  hand  with  its  applications  to  atomic  structure.  I  shall 
therefore  immediately  proceed  to  the  consideration  of  those  appli- 
cations of  the  theory  which  are  of  direct  importance  in  connection 
with  our  subject. 

Hydrogen  atom.  We  shall  commence  by  considering  the 
simplest  atom  conceivable,  namely,  an  atom  consisting  of  a  nucleus 
and  one  electron.  If  the  charge  on  the  nucleus  corresponds  to  that 
of  a  single  electron  and  the  system  consequently  is  neutral  we  have 
a  hydrogen  atom.  Those  developments  of  the  quantum  theory  which 
have  made  possible  its  application  to  atomic  structure  started  with 
the  interpretation  of  the  well-known  simple  spectrum  emitted  by 
hydrogen.  This  spectrum  consists  of  a  series  of  lines,  the  frequencies 
of  which  are  given  by  the  extremely  simple  Balmer  formula 


where  n"  and  ri  are  integers.  According  to  the  quantum  theory 
we  shall  now  assume  that  the  atom  possesses  a  series  of  stationary 
states  characterized  by  a  series  of  integers,  and  it  can  be  seen  how 
the  frequencies  given  by  formula  (2)  may  be  derived  from  the 
frequency  relation  if  it  is  assumed  that  a  hydrogen  line  is  con- 
nected with  a  radiation  emitted  during  a  transition  between  two 
of  these  states  corresponding  to  the  numbers  n'  and  n",  and  if  the 
energy  in  the  nth  state  apart  from  an  arbitrary  additive  constant 
is  supposed  to  be  given  by  the  formula 


(3) 


The  negative  sign  is  used  because  the  energy  of  the  atom  is 
measured  most  simply  by  the  work  required  to  remove  the  electron 
to  infinite  distance  from  the  nucleus,  and  we  shall  assume  that  the 
numerical  value  of  the  expression  on  the  right-hand  side  of  formula 
(3)  is  just  equal  to  this  work. 

As  regards  the  closer  description  of  the  stationary  states  we  find 
that  the  electron  will  very  nearly  describe  an  ellipse  with  the 
nucleus  in  the  focus.  The  major  axis  of  this  ellipse  is  connected 


64          THE  STRUCTURE  OF  THE  ATOM  AND  THE 

with  the  energy  of  the  atom  in  a  simple  way,  and  corresponding  to 
the  energy  values  of  the  stationary  states  given  by  formula  (3) 
there  are  a  series  of  values  for  the  major  axis  2a  of  the  orbit  of  the 
electron  given  by  the  formula 


where  e  is  the  numerical  value  of  the  charge  of  the  electron  and 
the  nucleus. 

On  the  whole  we  may  say  that  the  spectrum  of  hydrogen  shows 
us  the  formation  of  the  hydrogen  atom,  since  the  stationary  states 
may  be  regarded  as  different  stages  of  a  process  by  which  the  elec- 
tron under  the  emission  of  radiation  is  bound  in  orbits  of  smaller 
and  smaller  dimensions  corresponding  to  states  with  decreasing 
values  of  n.  It  will  be  seen  that  this  view  has  certain  charac- 
teristic features  in  common  with  the  binding  process  of  an  electron 
to  the  nucleus  if  this  were  to  take  place  according  to  the  ordinary 
electrodynamics,  but  that  our  view  differs  from  it  in  just  such  a 
way  that  it  is  possible  to  account  for  the  observed  properties  of 
hydrogen.  In  particular  it  is  seen  that  the  final  result  of  the 
binding  process  leads  to  a  quite  definite  stationary  state  of  the 
atom,  namely  that  state  for  which  n  =  \.  This  state  which  corre- 
sponds to  the  minimum  energy  of  the  atom  will  be  called  the 
normal  state  of  the  atom.  It  may  be  stated  here  that  the  values  of 
the  energy  of  the  atom  and  the  major  axis  of  the  orbit  of  the 
electron  which  are  found  if  we  put  n  =  1  in  formulae  (3)  and  (4) 
are  of  the  same  order  of  magnitude  as  the  values  of  the  firmness 
of  binding  of  electrons  and  of  the  dimensions  of  the  atoms  which 
have  been  obtained  from  experiments  on  the  electrical  and  me- 
chanical properties  of  gases.  A  more  accurate  check  of  formulae 
(3)  and  (4)  can  however  not  be  obtained  from  such  a  comparison, 
because  in  such  experiments  hydrogen  is  not  present  in  the  form 
of  simple  atoms  but  as  molecules. 

The  formal  basis  of  the  quantum  theory  consists  not  only  of  the 
frequency  relation,  but  also  of  conditions  which  permit  the  deter- 
mination of  the  stationary  states  of  atomic  systems.  The  latter 
conditions,  like  that  assumed  for  the  frequency,  may  be  regarded  as 
natural  generalizations  of  that  assumption  regarding  the  interaction 
between  simple  electrodynamic  systems  and  a  surrounding  field  of 


PHYSICAL  AND  CHEMICAL  PROPERTIES  OF  THE  ELEMENTS       65 

electromagnetic  radiation  which  forms  the  basis  of  Planck's  theory 
of  temperature  radiation.  I  shall  not  here  go  further  into  the 
nature  of  these  conditions  but  only  mention  that  by  their  means 
the  stationary  states  are  characterized  by  a  number  of  integers, 
the  so-called  quantum  numbers.  For  a  purely  periodic  motion  like 
that  assumed  in  the  case  of  the  hydrogen  atom  only  a  single 
quantum  number  is  necessary  for  the  determination  of  the  stationary 
states.  This  number  determines  the  energy  of  the  atom  and  also 
the  major  axis  of  the  orbit  of  the  electron,  but  not  its  excentricity. 
The  energy  in  the  various  stationary  states,  if  the  small  influence 
of  the  motion  of  the  nucleus  is  neglected,  is  given  by  the  following 
formula: 


where  e  and  m  are  respectively  the  charge  and  the  mass  of  the 
electron,  and  where  for  the  sake  of  subsequent  applications  the 
charge  on  the  nucleus  has  been  designated  by  Ne. 

For  the  atom  of  hydrogen  N=\,  and  a  comparison  with 
equation  (3)  leads  to  the  following  theoretical  expression  for  K  in 
formula  (2),  namely 


This  agrees  with  the  empirical  value  of  the  constant  for  the  spectrum 
of  hydrogen  within  the  limit  of  accuracy  with  which  the  various 
quantities  can  be  determined. 

Hydrogen  spectrum  and  X-ray  spectra.  If  in  the  above 
formula  we  put  N=2  which  corresponds  to  an  atom  consisting  of 
an  electron  revolving  around  a  nucleus  with  a  double  charge,  we 
get  values  for  the  energies  in  the  stationary  states,  which  are  four 
times  larger  than  the  energies  in  the  corresponding  states  of  the 
hydrogen  atom,  and  we  obtain  the  following  formula  for  the 
spectrum  which  would  be  emitted  by  such  an  atom  : 


This  formula  represents  certain  lines  which  have  been  known  for 
some  time  and  which  had  been  attributed  to  hydrogen  on  account 
of  the  great  similarity  between  formulae  (2)  and  (7)  since  it  had 


66          THE  STRUCTURE  OF  THE  ATOM  AND  THE 

never  been  anticipated  that  two  different  substances  could  exhibit 
properties  so  closely  resembling  each  other.  According  to  the  theory 
we  may,  however,  expect  that  the  emission  of  the  spectrum  given  by 
(7)  corresponds  to  the  first  stage  of  the  formation  of  the  helium  atom, 
i.e.  to  the  binding  of  a  first  electron  by  the  doubly  charged  nucleus 
of  this  atom.  This  interpretation  has  been  found  to  agree  with 
more  recent  information.  For  instance  it  has  been  possible  to 
obtain  this  spectrum  from  pure  helium.  I  have  dwelt  on  this  point 
in  order  to  show  how  this  intimate  connection  between  the  proper- 
ties of  two  elements,  which  at  first  sight  might  appear  quite 
surprising,  is  to  be  regarded  as  an  immediate  expression  of  the 
characteristic  simple  structure  of  the  nuclear  atom.  A  short  time 
after  the  elucidation  of  this  question,  new  evidence  of  extraordinary 
interest  was  obtained  of  such  a  similarity  between  the  properties  of 
the  elements.  I  refer  to  Moseley's  fundamental  researches  on  the 
X-ray  spectra  of  the  elements.  Moseley  found  that  these  spectra 
varied  in  an  extremely  simple  manner  from  one  element  to  the 
next  in  the  periodic  system.  It  is  well  known  that  the  lines  of 
the  X-ray  spectra  may  be  divided  into  groups  corresponding  to  the 
different  characteristic  absorption  regions  for  X-rays  discovered  by 
Barkla.  As  regards  the  K  group  which  contains  the  most  pene- 
trating X-rays,  Moseley  found  that  the  strongest  line  for  all  ele- 
ments investigated  could  be  represented  by  a  formula  which  with 
a  small  simplification  can  be  written 


K  is  the  same  constant  as  in  the  hj^drogen  spectrum,  and  N  the 
atomic  number.  The  great  significance  of  this  discovery  lies  in 
the  fact  that  it  would  seem  firmly  to  establish  the  view  that  this 
atomic  number  is  equal  to  the  number  of  electrons  in  the  atom. 
This  assumption  had  already  been  used  as  a  basis  for  work  on 
atomic  structure  and  was  first  stated  by  van  den  Broek.  While 
the  significance  of  this  aspect  of  Moseley's  discovery  was  at  once 
clear  to  all,  it  has  on  the  other  hand  been  more  difficult  to  under- 
stand the  very  great  similarity  between  the  spectrum  of  hydrogen 
and  the  X-ray  spectra.  This  similarity  is  shown,  not  only  by  the 
lines  of  the  K  group,  but  also  by  groups  of  less  penetrating  X-rays. 


PHYSICAL  AND  CHEMICAL  PROPERTIES  OF  THE  ELEMENTS       67 

Thus  Moseley  found  for  all  the  elements  he  investigated  that  the 
frequencies  of  the  strongest  line  in  the  L  group  may  be  represented 
by  a  formula  which  with  a  simplification  similar  to  that  employed 
in  formula  (8)  can  be  written 


Here  again  we  obtain  an  expression  for  the  frequency  which  corre- 
sponds to  a  line  in  the  spectrum  which  would  be  emitted  by  the 
binding  of  an  electron  to  a  nucleus,  whose  charge  is  Ne. 

The  fine  structure  of  the  hydrogen  lines.  This  similarity  be- 
tween the  structure  of  the  X-ray  spectra  and  the  hydrogen  spectrum 
was  still  further  extended  in  a  very  interesting  manner  by  Sommer- 
feld's  important  theory  of  the  fine  structure  of  the  hydrogen  lines. 
The  calculation  given  above  of  the  energy  in  the  stationary  states 
of  the  hydrogen  system,  where  each  state  is  characterized  by  a 
single  quantum  number,  rests  upon  the  assumption  that  the  orbit 
of  the  electron  in  the  atom  is  simply  periodic.  This  is,  however, 
only  approximately  true.  It  is  found  that  if  the  change  in  the  mass 
of  the  electron  due  to  its  velocity  is  taken  into  consideration  the 
orbit  of  the  electron  no  longer  remains  a  simple  ellipse,  but  its 
motion  may  be  described  as  a  central  motion  obtained  by  superposing 
a  slow  and  uniform  rotation  upon  a  simple  periodic  motion  in  a 
very  nearly  elliptical  orbit.  For  a  central  motion  of  this  kind  the 
stationary  states  are  characterized  by  two  quantum,  numbers.  In  the 
case  under  consideration  one  of  these  may  be  so  chosen  that  to  a 
very  close  approximation  it  will  determine  the  energy  of  the  atom 
in  the  same  manner  as  the  quantum  number  previously  used 
determined  the  energy  in  the  case  of  a  simple  elliptical  orbit.  This 
quantum  number  which  will  always  be  denoted  by  n  will  therefore 
be  called  the  "principal  quantum  number."  Besides  this  condition, 
which  to  a  very  close  approximation  determines  the  major  axis  in  the 
rotating  and  almost  elliptical  orbit,  a  second  condition  will  be  imposed 
upon  the  stationary  states  of  a  central  orbit,  namely  that  the  angular 
momentum  of  the  electron  about  the  centre  shall  be  equal  to  a  whole 
multiple  of  Planck's  constant  divided  by  2-n-.  The  whole  number,  which 
occurs  as  a  factor  in  this  expression,  may  be  regarded  as  the  second 
quantu  m  number  and  will  be  denoted  by  k.  The  latter  condition  fixes 

5—2 


68          THE  STRUCTURE  OF  THE  ATOM  AND  THE 

the  excentricity  of  the  rotating  orbit  which  in  the  case  of  a  simple 
periodic  orbit  was  undetermined.  It  should  be  mentioned  that  the 
possible  importance  of  the  angular  momentum  in  the  quantum  theory 
was  pointed  out  by  Nicholson  before  the  application  of  this  theory  to 
the  spectrum  of  hydrogen,  and  that  a  determination  of  the  stationary 
states  for  the  hydrogen  atom  similar  to  that  employed  by  Sommer- 
feld  was  proposed  almost  simultaneously  by  Wilson,  although  the 
latter  did  not  succeed  in  giving  a  physical  application  to  his  results. 
The  simplest  description  of  the  form  of  the  rotating  nearly 
elliptical  electronic  orbit  in  the  hydrogen  atom  is  obtained  by 
considering  the  chord  which  passes  through  the  focus  and  is 
perpendicular  to  the  major  axis,  the  so-called  "parameter."  The 
length  2p  of  this  parameter  is  given  to  a  very  close  approximation 
by  an  expression  of  exactly  the  same  form  as  the  expression  for  the 
major  axis,  except  that  k  takes  the  place  of  n.  Using  the  same 
notation  as  before  we  have  therefore 


For  each  of  the  stationary  states  which  had  previously  been  denoted 
by  a  given  value  of  n,  we  obtain  therefore  a  set  of  stationary  states 
corresponding  to  values  of  k  from  1  to  n.  Instead  of  the  simple 
formula  (5)  Sommerfeld  found  a  more  complicated  expression  for 
the  energy  in  the  stationary  states  which  depends  on  k  as  well  as 
n.  Taking  the  variation  of  the  mass  of  the  electron  with  velocity 
into  account  and  neglecting  terms  of  higher  order  of  magnitude  he 
obtained 


where  c  is  the  velocity  of  light. 

Corresponding  to  each  of  the  energy  values  for  the  stationary 
states  of  the  hydrogen  atom  given  by  the  simple  formula  (5)  we 
obtain  n  values  differing  only  very  little  from  one  another,  since 
the  second  term  within  the  bracket  is  very  small.  With  the  aid  of 
the  general  frequency  relation  (1)  we  therefore  obtain  a  number  of 
components  with  nearly  coincident  frequencies  instead  of  each 
hydrogen  line  given  by  the  simple  formula  (2).  Sommerfeld  has 
now  shown  that  this  calculation  actually  agrees  with  measurements 


PHYSICAL  AND  CHEMICAL  PROPERTIES  OF  THE  ELEMENTS       69 

of  the  fine  structure.  This  agreement  applies  not  only  to  the  fine 
structure  of  the  hydrogen  lines  which  is  very  difficult  to  measure 
on  account  of  the  extreme  proximity  of  the  components,  but  it  is 
also  possible  to  account  in  detail  for  the  fine  structure  of  the  helium 
lines  given  by  formula  (7)  which  has  been  very  carefully  in- 
vestigated by  Paschen.  Sommerfeld  in  connection  with  this  theory 
also  pointed  out  that  formula  (11)  could  be  applied  to  the  X-ray 
spectra.  Thus  he  showed  that  in  the  K  and  L  groups  pairs  of  lines 
appeared  the  differences  of  whose  frequencies  could  be  determined 
by  the  expression  (11)  for  the  energy  in  the  stationary  states  which 
correspond  to  the  binding  of  a  single  electron  by  a  nucleus  of 
charge  Ne. 

Periodic  table.  In  spite  of  the  great  formal  similarity  between 
the  X-ray  spectra  and  the  hydrogen  spectrum  indicated  by  these 
results  a  far-reaching  difference  must  be  assumed  to  exist  between 
the  processes  which  give  rise  to  the  appearance  of  these  two  types 
of  spectra.  While  the  emission  of  the  hydrogen  spectrum,  like  the 
emission  of  the  ordinary  optical  spectra  of  other  elements,  may  be 
assumed  to  be  connected  with  the  binding  of  an  electron  by  an 
atom,  observations  on  the  appearance  and  absorption  of  X-ray 
spectra  clearly  indicate  that  these  spectra  are  connected  with  a 
process  which  may  be  described  as  a  reorganization  of  the  electronic 
arrangement  after  a  disturbance  within  the  atom  due  to  the  effect 
of  external  agencies.  We  should  therefore  expect  that  the  appear- 
ance of  the  X-ray  spectra  would  depend  not  only  upon  the  direct 
interaction  between  a  single  electron  and  the  nucleus,  but  also  on 
the  manner  in  which  the  electrons  are  arranged  in  the  completely 
formed  atom. 

The  peculiar  manner  in  which  the  properties  of  the  elements 
vary  with  the  atomic  number,  as  expressed  in  the  periodic  system, 
provides  a  guide  of  great  value  in  considering  this  latter  problem. 
A  simple  survey  of  this  system  is  given  in  fig.  1.  The  number  pre- 
ceding each  element  indicates  the  atomic  number,  and  the  .elements 
within  the  various  vertical  columns  form  the  different  "periods"  of 
the  system.  The  lines,  which  connect  pairs  of  elements  in  successive 
columns,  indicate  homologous  properties  of  such  elements.  Com- 
pared with  usual  representations  of  the  periodic  system,  this  method, 


70 


THE  STRUCTURE  OF  THE  ATOM  AND  THE 


proposed  more  than  twenty  years  ago  by  Julius  Thomsen,  of  indi- 
cating the  periodic  variations  in  the  properties  of  the  elements  is 
more  suited  for  comparison  with  theories  of  atomic  constitution. 
The  meaning  of  the  frames  round  certain  sequences  of  elements 
within  the  later  periods  of  the  table  will  be  explained  later.  They 
refer  to  certain  characteristic  features  of  the  theory  of  atomic 
constitution. 


118- 


Fig.  1. 

In  an  explanation  of  the  periodic  system  it  is  natural  to  as- 
sume a  division  of  the  electrons  in  the  atom  into  distinct  groups 
in  such  a  manner  that  the  grouping  of  the  elements  in  the  system 
is  attributed  to  the  gradual  formation  of  the  groups  of  electrons 
in  the  atoms  as  the  atomic  number  increases.  Such  a  grouping 


PHYSICAL  AND  CHEMICAL  PROPERTIES  OF  THE  ELEMENTS       71 

of  the  electrons  in  the  atom  has  formed  a  prominent  part  of  all 
more  detailed  views  of  atomic  structure  ever  since  J.  J.  Thom- 
son's famous  attempt  to  explain  the  periodic  system  on  the  basis 
of  an  investigation  of  the  stability  of  various  electronic  configura- 
tions. Although  Thomson's  assumption  regarding  the  distribution 
of  the  positive  electricity  in  the  atom  is  not  consistent  with  more 
recent  experimental  evidence,  nevertheless  his  work  has  exerted 
great  influence  upon  the  later  development  of  the  atomic  theory  on 
account  of  the  many  original  ideas  which  it  contained. 

With  the  aid  of  the  information  concerning  the  binding  of 
electrons  by  the  nucleus  obtained  from  the  theory  of  the  hydrogen 
spectrum  I  attempted  in  the  same  paper  in  which  this  theory  was 
set  forth  to  sketch  in  broad  outlines  a  picture  of  the  structure  of 
the  nucleus  atom.  In  this  it  was  assumed  that  each  electron  in  its 
normal  state  moved  in  a  manner  analogous  to  the  motion  in 
the  last  stages  of  the  binding  of  a  single  electron  by  a  nucleus. 
As  in  Thomson's  theory,  it  was  assumed  that  the  electrons  moved 
in  circular  orbits  and  that  the  electrons  in  each  separate  group 
during  this  motion  occupied  positions  with  reference  to  one  another 
corresponding  to  the  vertices  of  plane  regular  polygons.  Such  an 
arrangement  is  frequently  described  as  a  distribution  of  the  electrons 
in  "rings."  By  means  of  these  assumptions  it  was  possible  to 
account  for  the  orders  of  magnitude  of  the  dimensions  of  the  atoms 
as  well  as  the  firmness  with  which  the  electrons  were  bound  by  the 
atom,  a  measure  of  which  may  be  obtained  by  means  of  experiments 
on  the  excitation  of  the  various  types  of  spectra.  It  was  not 
possible,  however,  in  this  way  to  arrive  at  a  detailed  explanation 
of  the  characteristic  properties  of  the  elements  even  after  it  had 
become  apparent  from  the  results  of  Moseley  and  the  work  of 
Sommerfeld  and  others  that  this  simple  picture  ought  to  be  ex- 
tended to  include  orbits  in  the  fully  formed  atom  characterized  by 
higher  quantum  numbers  corresponding  to  previous  stages  in  the 
formation  of  the  hydrogen  atom.  This  point  has  been  especially 
emphasized  by  Vegard. 

The  difficulty  of  arriving  at  a  satisfactory  picture  of  the  atom  is 
intimately  connected  with  the  difficulty  of  accounting  for  the  pro- 
nounced "stability"  which  the  properties  of  the  elements  demand. 
As  I  emphasized  when  considering  the  formation  of  the  hydrogen 


72          THE  STRUCTURE  OF  THE  ATOM  AND  THE 

atom,  the  postulates  of  the  quantum  theory  aim  directly  at  this 
point,  but  the  results  obtained  in  this  way  for  an  atom  containing 
a  single  electron  do  not  permit  of  a  direct  elucidation  of  problems 
like  that  of  the  distribution  in  groups  of  the  electrons  in  an  atom 
containing  several  electrons.  If  we  imagine  that  the  electrons  in 
the  groups  of  the  atom  are  orientated  relatively  to  one  another  at  any 
moment,  like  the  vertices  of  regular  polygons,  and  rotating  in  either 
circles  or  ellipses,  the  postulates  do  not  give  sufficient  information  to 
determine  the  difference  in  the  stability  of  electronic  configurations 
with  different  numbers  of  electrons  in  the  groups. 

The  peculiar  character  of  stability  of  the  atomic  structure,  de- 
manded by  the  properties  of  the  elements,  is  brought  out  in  an 
interesting  way  by  Kossel  in  two  important  papers.  In  the  first 
paper  he  shows  that  a  more  detailed  explanation  of  the  origin  of 
the  high  frequency  spectra  can  be  obtained  on  the  basis  of  the 
group  structure  of  the  atom.  He  assumes  that  a  line  in  the  X-ray 
spectrum  is  due  to  a  process  which  may  be  described  as  follows:  an 
electron  is  removed  from  the  atom  by  some  external  action  after 
which  an  electron  in  one  of  the  other  groups  takes  its  place;  this 
exchange  of  place  may  occur  in  as  many  ways  as  there  are  groups 
of  more  loosely  bound  electrons.  This  view  of  the  origin  of  the 
characteristic  X-rays  afforded  a  simple  explanation  of  the  peculiar 
absorption  phenomena  observed.  It  has  also  led  to  the  prediction 
of  certain  simple  relations  between  the  frequencies  of  the  X-ray 
lines  from  one  and  the  same  element  and  has  proved  to  be  a  suitable 
basis  for  the  classification  of  the  complete  spectrum.  However  it  has 
not  been  possible  to  develop  a  theory  which  reconciles  in  a  satis- 
factory way  Sommerfeld's  work  on  the  fine  structure  of  the  X-ray 
lines  with  Kossel's  general  scheme.  As  we  shall  see  later  the 
adoption  of  a  new  point  of  view  when  considering  the  stability  of 
the  atom  renders  it  possible  to  bring  the  different  results  in  a  natural 
way  in  connection  with  one  another. 

In  his  second  paper  Kossel  investigates  the  possibilities  for  an 
explanation  of  the  periodic  system  on  the  basis  of  the  atomic  theory. 
Without  entering  further  into  the  problem  of  the  causes  of  the 
division  of  the  electrons  into  groups,  or  the  reasons  for  the  different 
stability  of  the  various  electronic  configurations,  he  points  out  in 
connection  with  ideas  which  had  already  played  a  part  in  Thomson's 


PHYSICAL  AND  CHEMICAL  PROPERTIES  OF  THE  ELEMENTS       73 

theory,  how  the  periodic  system  affords  evidence  of  a  periodic  ap- 
pearance of  especially  stable  configurations  of  electrons.  These  con- 
figurations appear  in  the  neutral  atoms  of  elements  occupying  the 
final  position  in  each  period  in  fig.  1 ,  and  the  stability  in  question  is 
assumed  in  order  to  explain  not  only  the  inactive  chemical  properties 
of  these  elements  but  also  the  characteristic  active  properties  of  the 
immediately  preceding  or  succeeding  elements.  If  we  consider  for 
instance  an  inactive  gas  like  argon,  the  atomic  number  of  which  is  18, 
we  must  assume  that  the  18  electrons  in  the  atom  are  arranged  in 
an  exceedingly  regular  configuration  possessing  a  very  marked 
stability.  The  pronounced  electronegative  character  of  the  preceding 
element,  chlorine,  may  then  be  explained  by  supposing  the  neutral 
atom  which  contains  only  17  electrons  to  possess  a  tendency  to 
capture  an  additional  electron.  This  gives  rise  to  a  negative  chlorine 
ion  with  a  configuration  of  18  electrons  similar  to  that  occurring 
in  the  neutral  argon  atom.  On  the  other  hand  the  marked  electro- 
positive character  of  potassium  may  be  explained  by  supposing 
one  of  the  19  electrons  in  the  neutral  atom  to  be  as  it  were  super- 
fluous, and  that  this  electron  therefore  is  easily  lost;  the  rest  of  the 
atom  forming  a  positive  ion  of  potassium  having  a  constitution  similar 
to  that  of  the  argon  atom.  In  a  corresponding  manner  it  is  possible 
to  account  for  the  electronegative  and  electropositive  character  of 
elements  like  sulphur  and  calcium,  whose  atomic  numbers  are  16  and 
20.  In  contrast  to  chlorine  and  potassium  these  elements  are  divalent, 
and  the  stable  configuration  of  18  electrons  is  formed  by  the  addition 
of  two  electrons  to  the  sulphur  atom  and  by  the  loss  of  two  electrons 
from  the  calcium  atom.  Developing  these  ideas  Kossel  has  succeeded 
not  only  in  giving  interesting  explanations  of  a  large  number  of 
chemical  facts,  but  has  also  been  led  to  certain  general  conclusions 
about  the  grouping  of  the  electrons  in  elements  belonging  to  the 
first  periods  of  the  periodic  system,  which  in  certain  respects  are 
in  conformity  with  the  results  to  be  discussed  in  the  following 
paragraphs.  Kossel's  work  was  later  continued  in  an  interesting 
manner  by  Ladenburg  with  special  reference  to  the  grouping  of  the 
electrons  in  atoms  of  elements  belonging  to  the  later  periods  of  the 
periodic  table.  It  will  be  seen  that  Ladenburg's  conclusions  also 
exhibit  points  of  similarity  with  the  results  which  we  shall  discuss 
later. 


74          THE  STRUCTURE  OF  THE  ATOM  AND  THE 

Recent  atomic  models.  Up  to  the  present  time  it  has  not  been 
possible  to  obtain  a  satisfactory  account  based  upon  a  consistent  ap- 
plication of  the  quantum  theory  to  the  nuclear  atom  of  the  ultimate 
causeof  the  pronounced  stability  of  certain  arrangements  of  electrons. 
Nevertheless  it  has  been  apparent  for  some  time  that  the  solution 
should  be  sought  for  by  investigating  the  possibilities  of  a  spatial 
distribution  of  the  electronic  orbits  in  the  atom  instead  of  limiting 
the  investigation  to  configurations  in  which  all  electrons  belonging 
to  a  particular  group  move  in  the  same  plane  as  was  assumed  for 
simplicity  in  my  first  papers  on  the  structure  of  the  atom.  The 
necessity  of  assuming  a  spatial  distribution  of  the  configurations 
of  electrons  has  been  drawn  attention  to  by  various  writers.  Born 
and  Land6,  in  connection  with  their  investigations  of  the  structure 
and  properties  of  crystals,  have  pointed  out  that  the  assumption  of 
spatial  configurations  appears  necessary  for  an  explanation  of  these 
properties.  Lande"  has  pursued  this  question  still  further,  and  as 
will  be  mentioned  later  has  proposed  a  number  of  different  "spatial 
atomic  models"  in  which  the  electrons  in  each  separate  group  of 
the  atom  at  each  moment  form  configurations  possessing  regular 
polyhedral  symmetry.  These  models  constitute  in  certain  respects 
a  distinct  advance,  although  they  have  not  led  to  decisive  results 
on  questions  of  the  stability  of  atomic  structure. 

The  importance  of  spatial  electronic  configurations  has,  in  addition, 
been  pointed  out  by  Lewis  and  Langmuir  in  connection  with  their 
atomic  models.  Thus  Lewis,  who  in  several  respects  independently 
came  to  the  same  conclusions  as  Kossel,  suggested  that  the  number 
8  characterizing  the  first  groups  of  the  periodic  system  might  in- 
dicate a  constitution  of  the  outer  atomic  groups  where  the  electrons 
within  each  group  formed  a  configuration  like  the  corners  of  a  cube. 
He  emphasized  how  a  configuration  of  this  kind  leads  to  instructive 
models  of  the  molecular  structure  of  chemical  combinations.  It  is 
to  be  remarked,  however,  that  such  a  "static"  model  of  electronic 
configuration  will  not  be  possible  if  we  assume  the  forces  within 
the  atom  to  be  due  exclusively  to  the  electric  charges  of  the 
particles.  Langmuir,  who  has  attempted  to  develop  Lewis'  con- 
ceptions still  further  and  to  account  not  only  for  the  occurrence  of 
the  first  octaves,  but  also  for  the  longer  periods  of  the  periodic 
system,  supposes  therefore  the  structure  of  the  atoms  to  be  governed 


PHYSICAL  AND  CHEMICAL  PROPERTIES  OF  THE  ELEMENTS       75 

by  forces  whose  nature  is  unknown  to  us.  He  conceives  the  atom 
to  possess  a  "cellular  structure,"  so  that  each  electron  is  in  advance 
assigned  a  place  in  a  cell  and  these  cells  are  arranged  in  shells  in 
such  a  manner,  that  the  various  shells  from  the  nucleus  of  the  atom 
outward  contain  exactly  the  same  number  of  places  as  the  periods 
in  the  periodic  system  proceeding  in  the  direction  of  increasing 
atomic  number.  Langmuir's  work  has  attracted  much  attention 
among  chemists,  since  it  has  to  some  extent  thrown  light  on  the 
conceptions  with  which  empirical  chemical  science  is  concerned. 
On  his  theory  the  explanation  of  the  properties  of  the  various 
elements  is  based  on  a  number  of  postulates  about  the  structure  of 
the  atoms  formulated  for  that  purpose.  Such  a  descriptive  theory 
is  sharply  differentiated  from  one  where  an  attempt  is  made  to 
explain  the  specific  properties  of  the  elements  with  the  aid  of 
general  laws  applying  to  the  interaction  between  the  particles  in 
each  atom.  The  principal  task  of  this  lecture  will  consist  in  an 
attempt  to  show  that  an  advance  along  these  lines  appears  by  no 
means  hopeless,  but  on  the  contrary  that  with  the  aid  of  a  con- 
sistent application  of  the  postulates  of  the  quantum  theory  it 
actually  appears  possible  to  obtain  an  insight  into  the  structure 
and  stability  of  the  atom. 

II.    SERIES  SPECTRA  AND  THE  CAPTURE  OF  ELECTRONS 
BY  ATOMS 

We  attack  the  problem  of  atomic  constitution  by  asking  the 
question  :  "  How  may  an  atom  be  formed  by  the  successive  capture 
and  binding  of  the  electrons  one  by  one  in  the  field  of  force  sur- 
rounding the  nucleus?" 

Before  attempting  to  answer  this  question  it  will  first  be 
necessary  to  consider  in  more  detail  what  the  quantum  theory 
teaches  us  about  the  general  character  of  the  binding  process.  We 
have  already  seen  how  the  hydrogen  spectrum  gives  us  definite 
information  about  the  course  of  this  process  of  binding  the  electron 
by  the  nucleus.  In  considering  the  formation  of  the  atoms  of  other 
elements  we  have  also  in  their  spectra  sources  for  the  elucidation 
of  the  formation  processes,  but  the  direct  information  obtained  in 
this  way  is  not  so  complete  as  in  the  case  of  the  hydrogen  atom. 
For  an  element  of  atomic  number  N  the  process  of  formation  may 


76  TOT  OTKircTCflKC  or  vat,  ATOM  AKB  TOE 

be  regarded  af  oceamag  in  JT  *age»,  compano^  vita  the  soc- 


ItllMt  DC  SUMftUUtn  wO  CGfUBPpOHu  V>  €Stfu  Of  tB€9M? 

bat  only  for  the  first  two  element*,  hydrogen  and  hefiam,  do  we 
p0M*»  »  detailed  knowledge  of  tim  spate  For. 
of  higher  atomic  number,  where  Kraal  ipeefa*  will  be 
with  the  formation  of  the  atom,  we  are  at  prevent  acquainted  with 
only  two  types,  called  the  "arc"  and  "souk"  spectra  respectively, 
according  to  the  experimental  conditions  of  excitation.  Although 
these  spectra  show  a  much  more  complicated  structure  than  the 
hydrogen  spectrum,  given  by  formula  (2)  and  the  befinm  spectrum 
given  by  formula  (7),  nevertheless  in  many  cases  it  has  been 
possible  to  find  simple  laws  for  the  frequencies  exhibiting  a  dose 
analogy  with  the  laws  expressed  by  these  formulae. 

Arc  and  spark  spectra.  If  for  die  sake  of  simplicity  we  dis- 
regard the  complex  structure  shown  by  the  lines  of  most  spectra 
(occurrence  of  doublets,  triplets  etc.),  the  frequency  of  the  lines  of. 
many  arc  spectra  can  be  represented  to  a  dose  approximation  by 
the  Rydberg  formula 


where  n'  and  n"  are  integral  numbers,  K  the  same  constant  as  in 
the  hydrogen  spectrum,  while  o^  and  a**  are  two  constants  be- 
longing to  a  set  characteristic  of  the  element  A  spectrum  with  a 
structure  of  this  kind  is,  like  the  hydrogen  spectrum,  called  a  series 
spectrum,  since  the  lines  can  be  arranged  into  series  in  which  the/ 
frequencies  converge  to  definite  limiting  values.  These  series  are 
for  example  represented  by  formula  (12)  i£  using  two  definite 
constants  for  a^  and  a?,  n"  remains  unaltered,  while  n'  assumes  a 
series  of  successive,  gradually  increasing  integral  values. 

Formula  (12)  applies  only  approximately,  but  it  is  always  found 
that  the  frequencies  of  the  spectral  lines  can  be  written,  as  in 
formulae  (2)  and  (12),  as  a  difference  of  two  functions  of  integral 
numbers.  Thus  the  latter  formula  applies  accurately,  if  the 
quantities  ak  are  not  considered  as  constants,  but  as  representatives 
of  a  set  of  series  of  numbers  o*  (n)  characteristic  of  the  element, 
whose  values  for  increasing  n  within  each  series  quickly  approach 


PHYSICAL  AND  CHEMICAL  PROPERTIES  OF  THE  ELEMENTS       77 

constant  limiting  value.    The  fact  that  the  frequencies  of  the 

jectra  always  appear  as  the  difference  of  two  terms,  the  so-called 

spectral  terms,"  from  the  combinations  of  which  the  complete 

pectrum  is  formed,  has  been  pointed  out  by  Ritz,  who  with  the 

stablishment  of  the  combination  principle  has  greatly  advanced 

he  study  of  the  spectra.   The  quantum  theory  offers  an  immediate 

nterpretation  of  this  principle,  since,  according  to  the  frequency 

•elation  we  are  led  to  consider  the  lines  as  due  to  transitions 

>etween  stationary  states  of  the  atom,  just  as  in  the  hydrogen 

spectrum,  only  in  the  spectra  of  the  other  elements  we  have  to  do 

lot  with  a  single  series  of  stationary  states,  but  with  a  set  of  such 

series.    From  formula  (12)  we  thus  obtain  for  an  arc  spectrum  —  if 

we  temporarily  disregard  the  structure  of  the  individual  lines  — 

information  about  an  ensemble  of  stationary  states,  for  which  the 

energy  of  the  atom  in  the  nth  state  of  the  &th  series  is  given  by 


very  similar  to  the  simple  formula  (3)  for  the  energy  in  the  station- 
ary states  of  the  hydrogen  atom. 

As  regards  the  spark  spectra,  the  structure  of  which  has  been 
cleared  up  mainly  by  Fowler's  investigations,  it  has  been  possible 
in  the  case  of  many  elements  to  express  the  frequencies  approxi- 
mately by  means  of  a  formula  of  exactly  the  same  type  as  (12), 
only  with  the  difference  that  K,  just  as  in  the  helium  spectrum 
given  by  formula  (7),  is  replaced  by  a  constant,  which  is  four  times 
as  large.  For  the  spark  spectra,  therefore,  the  energy  values  in  the 
corresponding  stationary  states  of  the  atom  will  be  given  by  an 
expression  of  the  same  type  as  (13),  only  with  the  difference  that 
K  is  replaced  by  4iK. 

This  remarkable  similarity  between  the  structure  of  these  types 
of  spectra  and  the  simple  spectra  given  by  (2)  and  (7)  is  explained 
simply  by  assuming  the  arc  spectra  to  be  connected  with  the  last 
stage  in  the  formation  of  the  neutral  atom  consisting  in  the  capture 
and  binding  of  the  Nth  electron.  On  the  other  hand  the  spark 
spectra  are  connected  with  the  last  stage  but  one  in  the  formation 
of  the  atom,  namely  the  binding  of  the  (N—  l)th  electron.  In  these 
cases  the  field  of  force  in  which  the  electron  moves  will  be  much 


78          THE  STRUCTURE  OF  THE  ATOM  AND  THE 

the  same  as  that  surrounding  the  nucleus  of  a  hydrogen  or  helium 
atom  respectively,  at  least  in  the  earlier  stages  of  the  binding 
process,  where  during  the  greater  part  of  its  revolution  it  moves 
at  a  distance  from  the  nucleus  which  is  large  in  proportion  to  the 
dimensions  of  the  orbits  of  the  electrons  previously  bound.  From 
analogy  with  formula  (3)  giving  the  stationary  states  of  the 
hydrogen  atom,  we  shall  therefore  assume  that  the  numerical  value 
of  the  expression  on  the  right-hand  side  of  (13)  will  be  equal  to  the 
work  required  to  remove  the  last  captured  electron  from  the  atom, 
the  binding  of  which  gives  rise  to  the  arc  spectrum  of  the  element. 

Series  diagram.  While  the  origin  of  the  arc  and  spark  spectra 
was  to  this  extent  immediately  interpreted  on  the  basis  of  the 
original  simple  theoryof  the  hydrogen  spectrum,it  was  Sommerfeld's 
theory  of  the  fine  structure  of  the  hydrogen  lines  which  first  gave 
us  a  clear  insight  into  the  characteristic  difference  between  the 
hydrogen  spectrum  and  the  spark  spectrum  of  helium  on  the  one 
hand,  and  the  arc  and  spark  spectra  of  other  elements  on  the  other. 
When  we  consider  the  binding  not  of  the  first  but  of  the  subsequent 
electrons  in  the  atom,  the  orbit  of  the  electron  under  consideration 
— at  any  rate  in  the  latter  stages  of  the  binding  process  where  the 
electron  last  bound  comes  into  intimate  interaction  with  those 
previously  bound — will  no  longer  be  to  a  near  approximation  a 
closed  ellipse,  but  on  the  contrary  will  to  a  first  approximation  be  a 
central  orbit  of  the  same  type  as  in  the  hydrogen  atom,  when  we 
take  into  account  the  change  with  velocity  in  the  mass  of  the 
electron.  This  motion,  as  we  have  seen,  may  be  resolved  into  a 
plane  periodic  motion  upon  which  a  uniform  rotation  is  superposed 
in  the  plane  of  the  orbit ;  only  the  superposed  rotation  will  in  this 
case  be  comparatively  much  more  rapid  and  the  deviation  of  the 
periodic  orbit  from  an  ellipse  much  greater  than  in  the  case  of  the 
hydrogen  atom.  For  an  orbit  of  this  type  the  stationary  states,  just 
as  in  the  theory  of  the  fine  structure,  will  be  determined  by  two 
quantum  numbers  which  we  shall  denote  by  n  and  k,  connected  in 
a  very  simple  manner  with  the  kinematic  properties  of  the  orbit. 
For  brevity  I  shall  only  mention  that  while  the  quantum  number 
k  is  connected  with  the  value  of  the  constant  angular  momentum 
of  the  electron  about  the  centre  in  the  simple  manner  previously 


PHYSICAL  AND  CHEMICAL  PROPERTIES  OF  THE  ELEMENTS       79 


indicated,  the  determination  of  the  principal  quantum  number  n 
requires  an  investigation  of  the  whole  course  of  the  orbit  and  for 
an  arbitrary  central  orbit  will  not  be  related  in  a  simple  way  to 
the  dimensions  of  the  rotating  periodic  orbit  if  this  deviates  essen- 
tially from  a  Keplerian  ellipse. 


*-— 


I 


I  I 


Ot=D 
(k-2) 

ik=3> 
(k=4) 
Oc=5) 


Fig.  2. 


These  results  are  represented  in  fig.  2  which  is  a  repro- 
duction of  an  illustration  I  have  used  on  a  previous  occasion 
(see  Essay  II,  p.  30),  and  which  gives  a  survey  of  the  origin 
of  the  sodium  spectrum.  The  black  dots  represent  the  sta- 
tionary states  corresponding  to  the  various  series  of  spectral  terms, 
shown  on  the  right  by  the  letters  8,  P,  D  and  B.  These  letters 
correspond  to  the  usual  notations  employed  in  spectroscopic 
literature  and  indicate  the  nature  of  the  series  (sharp  series, 
principal  series,  diffuse  series,  etc.)  obtained  by  combinations  of 
the  corresponding  spectral  terms.  The  distances  of  the  separate 
points  from  the  vertical  line  at  the  right  of  the  figure  are  pro- 
portional to  the  numerical  value  of  the  energy  of  the  atom  given 
by  equation  (13).  The  oblique,  black  arrows  indicate  finally  the 
transitions  between  the  stationary  states  giving  rise  to  the 
appearance  of  the  lines  in  the  commonly  observed  sodium 
spectrum.  The  values  of  n  and  k  attached  to  the  various  states 
indicate  the  quantum  numbers,  which,  according  to  Sommerfeld's 
theory,  from  a  preliminary  consideration  might  be  regarded  as 
characterizing  the  orbit  of  the  outer  electron.  For  the  sake  of 
convenience  the  states  which  were  regarded  as  corresponding  to 
the  same  value  of  n  are  connected  by  means  of  dotted  lines,  and  these 
are  so  drawn  that  their  vertical  asymptotes  correspond  to  the 


80  THE  STRUCTURE  OF  THE  ATOM  AND  THE 

terms  in  the  hydrogen  spectrum  which  belong  to  the  same  value 
of  the  principal  quantum  number.  The  course  of  the  curves  illus- 
trates how  the  deviation  from  the  hydrogen  terms  may  be  expected 
to  decrease  with  increasing  values  of  k,  corresponding  to  states, 
where  the  minimum  distance  between  the  electron  in  its  revolution 
and  the  nucleus  constantly  increases. 

It  should  be  noted  that  even  though  the  theory  represents  the 
principal  features  of  the  structure  of  the  series  spectra  it  has  not 
yet  been  possible  to  give  a  detailed  account  of  the  spectrum  of  any 
element  by  a  closer  investigation  of  the  electronic  orbits  which  may 
occur  in  a  simple  field  of  force  possessing  central  symmetry.  As 
I  have  mentioned  already  the  lines  of  most  spectra  show  a  complex 
structure.  In  the  sodium  spectrum  for  instance  the  lines  of  the 
principal  series  are  doublets  indicating  that  to  each  P-term  not 
one  stationary  state,  but  two  such  states  correspond  with  slightly 
different  values  of  the  energy.  This  difference  is  so  little  that 
it  would  not  be  recognizable  in  a  diagram  on  the  same  scale  as 
fig.  2.  The  appearance  of  these  doublets  is  undoubtedly  due  to 
the  small  deviations  from  central  symmetry  of  the  field  of  force 
originating  from  the  inner  system  in  consequence  of  which  the 
general  type  of  motion  of  the  external  electron  will  possess  a 
more  complicated  character  than  that  of  a  simple  central  motion. 
As  a  result  the  stationary  states  must  be  characterized  by  more 
than  two  quantum  numbers,  in  the  same  way  that  the  occurrence 
of  deviations  of  the  orbit  of  the  electron  in  the  hydrogen  atom  from 
a  simple  periodic  orbit  requires  that  the  stationary  states  of  this 
atom  shall  be  characterized  by  more  than  one  quantum  number. 
Now  the  rules  of  the  quantum  theory  lead  to  the  introduction  of 
a  third  quantum  number  through  the  condition  that  the  resultant 
angular  momentum  of  the  atom,  multiplied  by  2?r,  is  equal  to  an 
entire  multiple  of  Planck's  constant.  This  determines  the  orienta- 
tion of  the  orbit  of  the  outer  electron  relative  to  the  axis  of  the 
inner  system. 

In  this  way  Sommerfeld,  Lande  and  others  have  shown  that  it 
is  possible  not  only  to  account  in  a  formal  way  for  the  complex 
structure  of  the  lines  of  the  series  spectra,  but  also  to  obtain  a 
promising  interpretation  of  the  complicated  effect  of  external 
magnetic  fields  on  this  structure.  We  shall  not  enter  here  on  these 


PHYSICAL  AND  CHEMICAL  PROPERTIES  OF  THE  ELEMENTS       81 

problems  but  shall  confine  ourselves  to  the  problem  of  the  fixation 
of  the  two  quantum  numbers  n  and  k,  which  to  a  first  approxi- 
mation describe  the  orbit  of  the  outer  electron  in  the  stationary 
states,  and  whose  determination  is  a  matter  of  prime  importance 
in  the  following  discussion  of  the  formation  of  the  atom.  In 
the  determination  of  these  numbers  we  at  once  encounter  diffi- 
culties of  a  profound  nature,  which — as  we  shall  see — are  intimately 
connected  with  the  question  of  the  remarkable  stability  of  atomic 
structure.  I  shall  here  only  remark  that  the  values  of  the  quantum 
number  n,  given  in  the  figure,  undoubtedly  can  not  be  retained, 
neither  for  the  S  nor  the  P  series.  On  the  other  hand,  so  far  as 
the  values  employed  for  the  quantum  number  k  are  concerned,  it 
may  be  stated  with  certainty,  that  the  interpretation  of  the  pro- 
perties of  the  orbits,  which  they  indicate,  is  correct.  A  starting 
point  for  the  investigation  of  this  question  has  been  obtained  from 
considerations  of  an  entirely  different  kind  from  those  previously 
mentioned,  which  have  made  it  possible  to  establish  a  close  con- 
nection between  the  motion  in  the  atom  and  the  appearance  of 
spectral  lines. 

Correspondence  principle.  So  far  as  the  principles  of  the 
quantum  theory  are  concerned,  the  point  which  has  been  emphasized 
hitherto  is  the  radical  departure  of  these  principles  from  our 
usual  conceptions  of  mechanical  and  electrodynamical  pheno- 
mena. As  I  have  attempted  to  show  in  recent  years,  it  appears 
possible,  however,  to  adopt  a  point  of  view  which  suggests  that  the 
quantum  theory  may,  nevertheless,  be  regarded  as  a  rational 
generalization  of  our  ordinary  conceptions.  As  may  be  seen  from 
the  postulates  of  the  quantum  theory,  and  particularly  the  frequency 
relation,  a  direct  connection  between  the  spectra  and  the  motion 
of  the  kind  required  by  the  classical  dynamics  is  excluded,  but  at 
the  same  time  the  form  of  these  postulates  leads  us  to  another 
relation  of  a  remarkable  nature.  Let  us  consider  an  electrodynamic 
system  and  inquire  into  the  nature  of  the  radiation  which  would 
result  from  the  motion  of  the  system  on  the  basis  of  the  ordinary 
conceptions.  We  imagine  the  motion  to  be  decomposed  into  purely 
harmonic  oscillations,  and  the  radiation  is  assumed  to  consist  of 
the  simultaneous  emission  of  series  of  electromagnetic  waves 
B.  6 


82          THE  STRUCTURE  OF  THE  ATOM  AND  THE 

possessing  the  same  frequency  as  these  harmonic  components  and 
intensities  which  depend  upon  the  amplitudes  of  the  components. 
An  investigation  of  the  formal  basis  of  the  quantum  theory  shows 
us  now,  that  it  is  possible  to  trace  the  question  of  the  origin  of  the 
radiation  processes  which  accompany  the  various  transitions  back 
to  an  investigation  of  the  various  harmonic  components,  which 
appear  in  the  motion  of  the  atom.  The  possibility,  that  a  parti- 
cular transition  shall  occur,  may  be  regarded  as  being  due  to  the 
presence  of  a  definitely  assignable  "corresponding"  component  in 
the  motion.  This  principle  of  correspondence  at  the  same  time 
throws  light  upon  a  question  mentioned  several  times  previously, 
namely  the  relation  between  the  number  of  quantum  numbers, 
which  must  be  used  to  describe  the  stationary  states  of  an  atom, 
and  the  types  to  which  the  orbits  of  the  electrons  belong.  The 
classification  of  these  types  can  be  based  very  simply  on  a  decom- 
position of  the  motion  into  its  harmonic  components.  Time  does 
not  permit  me  to  consider  this  question  any  further,  and  I  shall 
confine  myself  to  a  statement  of  some  simple  conclusions,  which 
the  correspondence  principle  permits  us  to  draw  concerning  the 
occurrence  of  transitions  between  various  pairs  of  stationary  states. 
These  conclusions  are  of  decisive  importance  in  the  subsequent 
argument. 

The  simplest  example  of  such  a  conclusion  is  obtained  by 
considering  an  atomic  system,  which  contains  a  particle  describing 
a  purely  periodic  orbit,  and  where  the  stationary  states  are  charac- 
terized by  a  single  quantum  number  n.  In  this  case  the  motion 
can  according  to  Fourier's  theorem  be  decomposed  into  a  simple 
series  of  harmonic  oscillations  whose  frequency  may  be  written  TO>, 
where  r  is  a  whole  number,  and  <u  is  the  frequency  of  revolution 
in  the  orbit.  It  can  now  be  shown  that  a  transition  between  two 
stationary  states,  for  which  the  values  of  the  quantum  number  are 
respectively  equal  to  n'  and  n",  will  correspond  to  a  harmonic 
component,  for  which  r  =  n  —  n".  This  throws  at  once  light  upon 
the  remarkable  difference  which  exists  between  the  possibilities 
of  transitions  between  the  stationary  states  of  a  hydrogen  atom 
on  the  one  hand  and  of  a  simple  system  consisting  of  an  electric 
particle  capable  of  executing  simple  harmonic  oscillations  about  a 
position  of  equilibrium  on  the  other.  For  the  latter  system,  which 


PHYSICAL  AND  CHEMICAL  PROPERTIES  OF  THE  ELEMENTS       83 

is  frequently  called  a  Planck  oscillator,  the  energy  in  the  stationary 
states  is  determined  by  the  familiar  formula  E  =  nhca,  and  with  the 
aid  of  the  frequency  relation  we  obtain  therefore  for  the  radiation 
which  will  be  emitted  during  a  transition  between  two  stationary 
states  v  =  (ri  —  n")  o>.  Now,  an  important  assumption,  which  is  not 
only  essential  in  Planck's  theory  of  temperature  radiation,  but 
which  also  appears  necessary  to  account  for  the  molecular  absorption 
in  the  infra-red  region  of  radiation,  states  that  a  harmonic  oscillator 
will  only  emit  and  absorb  radiation,  for  which  the  frequency  v  is 
equal  to  the  frequency  of  oscillation  o>  of  the  oscillator.  We  are 
therefore  compelled  to  assume  that  in  the  case  of  the  oscillator 
transitions  can  occur  only  between  stationary  states  which  are 
characterized  by  quantum  numbers  differing  by  only  one  unit, 
while  in  the  hydrogen  spectrum  represented  by  formula  (2)  all 
possible  transitions  could  take  place  between  the  stationary  states 
given  by  formula  (5).  From  the  point  of  view  of  the  principle  of 
correspondence  it  is  seen,  however,  that  this  apparent  difficulty  is 
explained  by  the  occurrence  in  the  motion  of  the  hydrogen  atom, 
as  opposed  to  the  motion  of  the  oscillator,  of  harmonic  components 
corresponding  to  values  of  r,  which  are  different  from  1;  or  using 
a  terminology  well  known  from  acoustics,  there  appear  overtones 
in  the  motion  of  the  hydrogen  atom. 

Another  simple  example  of  the  application  of  the  correspondence 
principle  is  afforded  by  a  central  motion,  to  the  investigation  of 
which  the  explanation  of  the  series  spectra  in  the  first  approxima- 
tion may  be  reduced.  Referring  once  more  to  the  figure  of  the 
sodium  spectrum,  we  see  that  the  black  arrows,  which  correspond 
to  the  spectral  lines  appearing  under  the  usual  conditions  of 
excitation,  only  connect  pairs  of  points  in  consecutive  rows.  Now 
it  is  found  that  this  remarkable  limitation  of  the  occurrence  of 
combinations  between  spectral  terms  may  quite  naturally  be 
explained  by  an  investigation  of  the  harmonic  components  into 
which  a  central  motion  can  be  resolved.  It  can  readily  be  shown 
that  such  a  motion  can  be  decomposed  into  two  series  of  harmonic 
components,  whose  frequencies  can  be  expressed  by  TO)  +  a-  and 
TCO  —  cr  respectively,  where  r  is  a  whole  number,  «o  the  frequency  of 
revolution  in  the  rotating  periodic  orbit  and  a  the  frequency  of  the 
superposed  rotation.  These  components  correspond  with  transitions 

6—2 


84          THE  STRUCTURE  OF  THE  ATOM  AND  THE 

where  the  principal  number  n  decreases  by  r  units,  while  the 
quantum  number  k  decreases  or  increases,  respectively,  by  one 
unit,  corresponding  exactly  with  the  transitions  indicated  by  the 
black  arrows  in  the  figure.  This  may  be  considered  as  a  very 
important  result,  because  we  may  say,  that  the  quantum  theory, 
which  for  the  first  time  has  offered  a  simple  interpretation  of  the 
fundamental  principle  of  combination  of  spectral  lines  has  at  the 
same  time  removed  the  mystery  which  has  hitherto  adhered 
to  the  application  of  this  principle  on  account  of  the  apparent 
capriciousness  of  the  appearance  of  predicted  combination  lines. 
Especially  attention  may  be  drawn  to  the  simple  interpretation 
which  the  quantum  theory  offers  of  the  appearance  observed  by 
Stark  and  his  collaborators  of  certain  new  series  of  lines,  which  do 
not  appear  under  ordinary  circumstances,  but  which  are  excited 
when  the  emitting  atoms  are  subject  to  intense  external  electric 
fields.  In  fact,  on  the  correspondence  principle  this  is  immediately 
explained  from  an  examination  of  the  perturbations  in  the  motion 
of  the  outer  electron  which  give  rise  to  the  appearance  in  this 
motion — besides  the  harmonic  components  already  present  in  a 
simple  central  orbit — of  a  number  of  constituent  harmonic  vibra- 
tions of  new  type  and  of  amplitudes  proportional  to  the  intensity 
of  the  external  forces. 

It  may  be  of  interest  to  note  that  an  investigation  of  the 
limitation  of  the  possibility  of  transitions  between  stationary 
states,  based  upon  a  simple  consideration  of  conservation  of  angular 
momentum  during  the  process  of  radiation,  does  not,  contrary  to 
what  has  previously  been  supposed  (compare  Essay  II,  p.  62), 
suffice  to  throw  light  on  the  remarkably  simple  structure  of  series 
spectra  illustrated  by  the  figure.  As  mentioned  above  we  must 
assume  that  the  "complexity"  of  the  spectral  terms,  corresponding 
to  given  values  of  n  and  k,  which  we  witness  in  the  fine 
structure  of  the  spectral  lines,  may  be  ascribed  to  states,  cor- 
responding to  different  values  of  this  angular  momentum,  in 
which  the  plane  of  the  electronic  orbit  is  orientated  in  a  different 
manner,  relative  to  the  configuration  of  the  previously  bound 
electrons  in  the  atom.  Considerations  of  conservation  of  angular 
momentum  can,  in  connection  with  the  series  spectra,  therefore  only 
contribute  to  an  understanding  of  the  limitation  of  the  possibilities 


PHYSICAL  AND  CHEMICAL  PROPERTIES  OF  THE  ELEMENTS       85 

of  combination  observed  in  the  peculiar  laws  applying  to  the 
number  of  components  in  the  complex  structure  of  the  lines.  So 
far  as  the  last  question  is  concerned,  such  considerations  offer  a 
direct  support  for  the  consequences  of  the  correspondence  principle. 

III.   FORMATION  OF  ATOMS  AND  THE  PERIODIC  TABLE 

A  correspondence  has  been  shown  to  exist  between  the  motion 
of  the  electron  last  captured  and  the  occurrence  of  transitions 
between  the  stationary  states  corresponding  to  the  various  stages 
of  the  binding  process.  This  fact  gives  a  point  of  departure  for  a 
choice  between  the  numerous  possibilities  which  present  themselves 
when  considering  the  formation  of  the  atoms  by  the  successive 
capture  and  binding  of  the  electrons.  Among  the  processes  which 
are  conceivable  and  which  according  to  the  quantum  theory  might 
occur  in  the  atom  we  shall  reject  those  whose  occurrence  can  not  be 
regarded  as  consistent  with  a  correspondence  of  the  required  nature. 

First  Period.  Hydrogen — Helium.  It  will  not  be  necessary  to 
concern  ourselves  long  with  the  question  of  the  constitution  of  the 
hydrogen  atom.  From  what  has  been  said  previously  we  may  assume 
that  the  final  result  of  the  process  of  binding  of  the  first  electron  in 
any  atom  will  be  a  stationary  state,  where  the  energy  of  the  atom 
is  given  by  (5),  if  we  put  n  =  1,  or  more  precisely  by  formula  (11), 
if  we  put  n  =  1  and  k  =  1.  The  orbit  of  the  electron  will  be  a  circle 
whose  radius  will  be  given  by  formulae  (10),  if  n  and  k  are  each 
put  equal  to  1.  Such  an  orbit  will  be  called  a  1 -quantum  orbit, 
and  in  general  an  orbit  for  which  the  principal  quantum  number 
has  a  given  value  n  will  be  called  an  n-quantum  orbit.  Where  it 
is  necessary  to  differentiate  between  orbits  corresponding  to  various 
values  of  the  quantum  number  k,  a  central  orbit,  characterized  by 
given  values  of  the  quantum  numbers  n  and  k,  will  be  referred  to 
as  an  nk  orbit. 

In  the  question  of  the  constitution  of  the  helium  atom  we  meet 
the  much  more  complicated  problem  of  the  binding  of  the  second 
electron.  Information  about  this  binding  process  may,  however,  be 
obtained  from  the  arc  spectrum  of  helium.  This  spectrum,  as 
opposed  to  most  other  simple  spectra,  consists  of  two  complete 
systems  of  lines  with  frequencies  given  by  formulae  of  the  type 


86          THE  STRUCTURE  OF  THE  ATOM  AND  THE 

(12).  On  this  account  helium  was  at  first  assumed  to  be  a  mixture 
of  two  different  gases,  "orthohelium"  and  "parhelium,"  but  now  we 
know  that  the  two  spectra  simply  mean  that  the  binding  of  the  second 
electron  can  occur  in  two  different  ways.  A  theoretical  explanation  of 
the  main  features  of  the  helium  spectrum  has  recentlybeen  attempted 
in  an  interesting  paper  by  Lande.  He  supposes  the  emission  of  the 
orthohelium  spectrum  to  be  due  to  transitions  between  stationary 
states  where  both  electrons  move  in  the  same  plane  and  revolve 
in  the  same  sense.  The  parhelium  spectrum,  on  the  other  hand,  is 
ascribed  by  him  to  stationary  states  where  the  planes  of  the  orbits 
form  an  angle  with  each  other.  Dr  Kramers  and  I  have  made  a 
closer  investigation  of  the  interaction  between  the  two  orbits  in 
the  different  stationary  states.  The  results  of  our  investigation 
which  was  begun  several  years  before  the  appearance  of  Lande's 
work  have  not  yet  been  published.  Without  going  into  details 
I  may  say,  that  even  though  our  results  in  several  respects  differ 
materially  from  those  of  Lande"  (compare  Essay  II,  p.  56),  we  agree 
with  his  general  conclusions  concerning  the  origin  of  the  ortho- 
helium  and  parhelium  spectra. 

The  final  result  of  the  binding  of  the  second  electron  is  inti- 
mately related  to  the  origin  of  the  two  helium  spectra.  Important 
information  on  this  point  has  been  obtained  recently  by  Franck 
and  his  co-workers.  As  is  well  known  he  has  thrown  light  upon 
many  features  of  the  structure  of  the  atom  and  of  the  origin 
of  spectra  by  observing  the  effect  of  bombarding  atoms  by 
electrons  of  various  velocities.  A  short  time  ago  these  experiments 
showed  that  the  impact  of  electrons  could  bring  helium  into  a 
"metastable"  state  from  which  the  atom  cannot  return  to  its 
normal  state  by  means  of  a  simple  transition  accompanied  by  the 
emission  of  radiation,  but  only  by  means  of  a  process  analogous  to 
a  chemical  reaction  involving  interaction  with  atoms  of  other 
elements.  This  result  is  closely  connected  with  the  fact  that  the 
binding  of  the  second  electron  can  occur  in  two  different  ways,  as 
is  shown  by  the  occurrence  of  two  distinct  spectra.  Thus  it  is 
evident  from  Franck's  experiments  that  the  normal  state  of  the 
atom  is  the  last  stage  in  the  binding  process  involving  the  emission 
of  the  parhelium  spectrum  by  which  the  electron  last  captured  as 
well  as  the  one  first  captured  will  be  bound  in  a  lj  orbit.  The 


PHYSICAL  AND  CHEMICAL  PROPERTIES  OF  THE  ELEMENTS       87 

metastable  state,  on  the  contrary,  is  the  final  stage  of  the  process 
giving  the  orthohelium  spectrum.  In  this  case  the  second  electron, 
as  opposed  to  the  first,  will  move  in  a  2!  orbit.  This  corresponds  to 
a  firmness  of  binding  which  is  about  six  times  less  than  for  the 
electron  in  the  normal  state  of  the  atom. 

If  we  now  consider  somewhat  more  closely  this  apparently 
surprising  result,  it  is  found  that  a  clear  grasp  of  it  may  be  obtained 
from  the  point  of  view  of  correspondence.  It  can  be  shown  that 
the  coherent  class  of  motions  to  which  the  orthohelium  orbits 
belong  does  not  contain  a  ll  orbit.  If  on  the  whole  we  would  claim 
the  existence  of  a  state  where  the  two  electrons  move  in  lj  orbits 
in  the  same  plane,  and  if  in  addition  it  is  claimed  that  the  motion 
should  possess  the  periodic  properties  necessary  for  the  definition 
of  stationary  states,  then  there  seems  that  no  possibility  is  afforded 
other  than  the  assumption  that  the  two  electrons  move  around  the 
nucleus  in  one  and  the  same  orbit,  in  such  a  manner  that  at  each 
moment  they  are  situated  at  the  ends  of  a  diameter.  This  extremely 
simple  ring-configuration  might  be  expected  to  correspond  to 
the  firmest  possible  binding  of  the  electrons  in  the  atom,  and  it 
was  on  this  account  proposed  as  a  model  for  the  helium  atom  in 
my  first  paper  on  atomic  structure.  If,  however,  we  inquire  about 
the  possibility  of  a  transition  from  one  of  the  orthohelium  states 
to  a  configuration  of  this  type  we  meet  conditions  which  are  very 
different  from  those  which  apply  to  transitions  between  two  of 
the  orthohelium  orbits.  In  fact,  the  occurrence  of  each  of  these 
transitions  is  due  to  the  existence  of  well-defined  corresponding 
constituent  harmonic  vibration  in  the  central  orbits  which  the  outer 
electron  describes  in  the  class  of  motions  to  which  the  stationary 
states  belong.  The  transition  we  have  to  discuss,  on  the  other 
hand,  is  one  by  which  the  last  captured  electron  is  transferred  from 
a  state  in  which  it  is  moving  "  outside"  the  other  to  a  state  in  which 
it  moves  round  the  nucleus  on  equal  terms  with  the  other  electron. 
Now  it  is  impossible  to  find  a  series  of  simple  intermediate  forms 
for  the  motion  of  those  two  electrons  in  which  the  orbit  of  the  last 
captured  electron  exhibits  a  sufficient  similarity  to  a  central  motion 
that  for  this  transition  there  could  be  a  correspondence  of  the 
necessary  kind.  It  is  therefore  evident,  that  where  the  two  electrons 
move  in  the  same  plane,  the  electron  captured  last  can  not  be 


88          THE  STRUCTURE  OF  THE  ATOM  AND  THE 

bound  firmer  than  in  a  2j  orbit.  If,  on  the  other  hand,  we  consider 
the  binding  process  which  accompanies  the  emission  of  theparhelium 
spectrum  and  where  the  electrons  in  the  stationary  states  move  in 
orbits  whose  planes  form  angles  with  one  another  we  meet  essen- 
tially different  conditions.  A  corresponding  intimate  change  in  the 
interaction  between  the  electron  last  captured  and  the  one  previously 
bound  is  not  required  here  for  the  two  electrons  in  the  atom  to 
become  equivalent.  We  may  therefore  imagine  the  last  stage  of 
the  binding  process  to  take  place  in  a  manner  similar  to  those 
stages  corresponding  to  transitions  between  orbits  characterized  by 
greater  values  of  n  and  k, 

In  the  normal  state  of  the  helium  atom  the  two  electrons  must 
be  assumed  to  move  in  equivalent  11  orbits.  As  a  first  approximation 
these  may  be  described  as  two  circular  orbits,  whose  planes  make 
an  angle  of  120°  with  one  another,  in  agreement  with  the  conditions 
which  the  angular  momentum  of  an  atom  according  to  the  quantum 
theory  must  satisfy.  On  account  of  the  interaction  between  the 
two  electrons  these  planes  at  the  same  time  turn  slowly  around 
the  fixed  impulse  axis  of  the  atom.  Starting  from  a  distinctly 
different  point  of  view  Kemble  has  recently  suggested  a  similar 
model  for  the  helium  atom.  He  has  at  the  same  time  directed 
attention  to  a  possible  type  of  motion  of  very  marked  symmetry 
in  which  the  electrons  during  their  entire  revolution  assume 
symmetrical  positions  with  reference  to  a  fixed  axis.  Kemble  has 
not,  however,  investigated  this  motion  further.  Previous  to  the 
appearance  of  this  paper  Kramers  had  commenced  a  closer  investi- 
gation of  precisely  this  type  of  motion  in  order  to  find  out  to  what 
extent  it  was  possible  from  such  a  calculation  to  account  for  the 
firmness  with  which  the  electrons  are  bound  in  the  helium  atom, 
that  is  to  account  for  the  ionization  potential.  Early  measurements 
of  this  potential  had  given  values  corresponding  approximately  to 
that  which  would  result  from  the  ring-configuration  already  men- 
tioned. This  requires  17/8  as  much  work  to  remove  a  single 
electron  as  is  necessary  to  remove  an  electron  from  the  hydrogen 
atom  in  its  normal  state.  As  the  theoretical  value  for  the  latter 
amount  of  work — which  for  the  sake  of  simplicity  will  be  repre- 
sented by  W — corresponds  to  an  ionization  potential  of  13'53  volts, 
the  ionization  potential  of  helium  would  be  expected  to  be  28 -8 


PHYSICAL  AND  CHEMICAL  PROPERTIES  OF  THE  ELEMENTS       89 

volts.  Recent  and  more  accurate  determinations,  however,  have 
given  a  value  for  the  ionization  potential  of  helium  which  is  con- 
siderably lower  and  lies  in  the  neighbourhood  of  25  volts.  This 
showed  therefore  the  untenability  of  the  ring-configuration  quite 
independently  of  any  other  considerations.  A  careful  investigation  of 
the  spatial  atomic  configuration  requires  elaborate  calculation,  and 
Kramers  has  not  yet  obtained  final  results.  With  the  approximation 
to  which  they  have  been  so  far  completed  the  calculations  point  to 
the  possibility  of  an  agreement  with  the  experimental  results.  The 
final  result  may  be  awaited  with  great  interest,  since  it  offers  in 
the  simplest  case  imaginable  a  test  of  the  principles  by  which  we 
are  attempting  to  determine  stationary  states  of  atoms  containing 
more  than  one  electron. 

Hydrogen  and  helium,  as  seen  in  the  survey  of  the  periodic 
system  given  in  fig.  1,  together  form  the  first  period  in  the  system 
of  elements,  since  helium  is  the  first  of  the  inactive  gases.  The  great 
difference  in  the  chemical  properties  of  hydrogen  and  helium  is 
closely  related  to  the  great  difference  in  the  nature  of  the  binding 
of  the  electron.  This  is  directly  indicated  by  the  spectra  and 
ionization  potentials.  While  helium  possesses  the  highest  known 
ionization  potential  of  all  the  elements,  the  binding  of  the  electron 
in  the  hydrogen  atom  is  sufficiently  loose  to  account  for  the  tendency 
of  hydrogen  to  form  positive  ions  in  aqueous  solutions  and  chemical 
combinations.  Further  consideration  of  this  particular  question 
requires,  however,  a  comparison  between  the  nature  and  firmness 
of  the  electronic  configurations  of  other  atoms,  and  it  can  therefore 
not  be  discussed  at  the  moment. 

Second  Period.  Lithium — Neon.  When  considering  the  atomic 
structure  of  elements  which  contain  more  than  two  electrons  in  the 
neutral  atom,  we  shall  assume  first  of  all  that  what  has  previously 
been  said  about  the  formation  of  the  helium  atom  will  in  the  main 
features  also  apply  to  the  capture  and  binding  of  the  first  two 
electrons.  These  electrons  may,  therefore,  in  the  normal  state  of 
the  atom  be  regarded  as  moving  in  equivalent  orbits  characterized 
by  the  quantum  symbol  1^  We  obtain  direct  information  about 
the  binding  of  the  third  electron  from  the  spectrum  of  lithium. 
This  spectrum  shows  the  existence  of  a  number  of  series  of 


90          THE  STRUCTURE  OF  THE  ATOM  AND  THE 

stationary  states,  where  the  firmness  with  which  the  last  captured 
electron  is  bound  is  very  nearly  the  same  as  in  the  stationary  states 
of  the  hydrogen  atom.  These  states  correspond  to  orbits  where  k 
is  greater  than  or  equal  to  2,  and  where  the  last  captured  electron 
moves  entirely  outside  the  region  where  the  first  two  electrons 
move.  But  in  addition  this  spectrum  gives  us  information  about  a 
series  of  states  corresponding  to  k  =  1  in  which  the  energy  differs 
essentially  from  the  corresponding  stationary  states  of  the  hydrogen 
atom.  In  these  states  the  last  captured  electron,  even  if  it  remains 
at  a  considerable  distance  from  the  nucleus  during  the  greater  part 
of  its  revolution,  will  at  certain  moments  during  the  revolution 
approach  to  a  distance  from  the  nucleus  which  is  of  the  same  order 
of  magnitude  as  the  dimensions  of  the  orbits  of  the  previously 
bound  electrons.  On  this  account  the  electrons  will  be  bound  with 
a  firmness  which  is  considerably  greater  than  that  with  which  the 
electrons  are  bound  in  the  stationary  states  of  the  hydrogen  atom 
corresponding  to  the  same  value  of  n. 

Now  as  regards  the  lithium  spectrum  as  well  as  the  other  alkali 
spectra  we  are  so  fortunate  (see  p.  32)  as  to  possess  definite  evidence 
about  the  normal  state  of  the  atom  from  experiments  on  selective 
absorption.  In  fact  these  experiments  tell  us  that  the  first  member 
of  the  sequence  of  $-terms  corresponds  to  this  state.  This  term 
corresponds  to  a  strength  of  binding  which  is  only  a  little  more  than 
a  third  of  that  of  the  hydrogen  atom.  We  must  therefore  conclude 
that  the  outer  electron  in  the  normal  state  of  the  lithium  atom 
moves  in  a  2X  orbit,  just  as  the  outer  electron  in  the  metastable 
state  of  the  helium  atom.  The  reason  why  the  binding  of  the 
outer  electron  can  not  proceed  to  an  orbit  characterized  by  a  smaller 
value  for  the  total  quantum  number  may  also  be  considered  as 
analogous  in  the  two  cases.  In  fact,  a  transition  by  which  the  third 
electron  in  the  lithium  atom  was  ultimately  bound  in  a  la  orbit 
would  lead  to  a  state  in  the  atom  in  which  the  electron  would  play 
an  equivalent  part  with  the  two  electrons  previously  bound.  Such 
a  process  would  be  of  a  type  entirely  different  from  the  transitions 
between  the  stationary  states  connected  with  the  emission  of  the 
lithium  spectrum,  and  would,  contrary  to  these,  not  exhibit  a 
correspondence  with  a  harmonic  component  in  the  motion  of  the 
atom. 


PHYSICAL  AND  CHEMICAL  PROPERTIES  6?  THE  ELEMENTS       91 

We  obtain,  therefore,  a  picture  of  the  formation  and  structure  of 
the  lithium  atom  which  offers  a  natural  explanation  of  the  great 
difference  of  the  chemical  properties  of  lithium  from  those  of  helium 
and  hydrogen.  This  difference  is  at  once  explained  by  the  fact  that 
the  firmness  by  which  the  last  captured  electron  is  bound  in  its 
2j  orbit  in  the  lithium  atom  is  only  about  a  third  of  that  with  which 
the  electron  in  the  hydrogen  atom  is  held,  and  almost  five  times 
smaller  than  the  firmness  of  the  binding  of  the  electrons  in  the 
helium  atom. 

What  has  been  said  here  applies  not  alone  to  the  formation  of 
the  lithium  atom,  but  may  also  be  assumed  to  apply  to  the  binding 
of  the  third  electron  in  every  atom,  so  that  in  contrast  to  the  first 
two  electrons  which  move  in  lj  orbits  this  may  be  assumed  to  move 
in  a  2j  orbit.  As  regards  the  binding  of  the  fourth,  fifth  and  sixth 
electrons  in  the  atom,  we  do  not  possess  a  similar  guide  as  no  simple 
series  spectra  are  known  of  beryllium,  boron  and  carbon.  Although 
conclusions  of  the  same  degree  of  certainty  can  not  be  reached  it 
seems  possible,  however,  to  arrive  at  results  consistent  with  general 
physical  and  chemical  evidence  by  proceeding  by  means  of  con- 
siderations of  the  same  kind  as  those  applied  to  the  binding  of  the 
first  three  electrons.  In  fact,  we  shall  assume  that  the  fourth,  fifth 
and  sixth  electrons  will  be  bound  in  2j  orbits.  The  reason  why  the 
binding  of  a  first  electron  in  an  orbit  of  this  type  will  not  prevent  the 
capture  of  the  others  in  two  quanta  orbits  may  be  ascribed  to  the  fact 
that  2j  orbits  are  not  circular  but  very  excentric.  For  example,  the 
3rd  electron  cannot  keep  the  remaining  electrons  away  from  the  inner 
system  in  the  same  way  in  which  the  first  two  electrons  bound  in 
the  lithium  atom  prevent  the  third  from  being  bound  in  a 
1-quantum  orbit.  Thus  we  shall  expect  that  the  4th,  5th  and  6th 
electrons  in  a  similar  way  to  the  3rd  will  at  certain  moments  of 
their  revolution  enter  into  the  region  where  the  first  two 
bound  electrons  move.  We  must  not  imagine,  however,  that  these 
visits  into  the  inner  system  take  place  at  the  same  time,  but 
that  the  four  electrons  visit  the  nucleus  separately  at  equal 
intervals  of  time.  In  earlier  work  on  atomic  structure  it  was  sup- 
posed that  the  electrons  in  the  various  groups  in  the  atom  moved 
in  separate  regions  within  the  atom  and  that  at  each  moment  the 
electrons  within  each  separate  group  were  arranged  in  configurations 


92          THE  STRUCTURE  OF  THE  ATOM  AND  THE 

possessing  symmetry  like  that  of  a  regular  polygon  or  polyhedron. 
Among  other  things  this  involved  that  the  electrons  in  each  group 
were  supposed  to  be  at  the  point  of  the  orbit  nearest  the  nucleus 
at  the  same  time.  A  structure  of  this  kind  may  be  described  as  one 
where  the  motions  of  the  electrons  within  the  groups  are  coupled 
together  in  a  manner  which  is  largely  independent  of  the  interaction 
between  the  various  groups.  On  the  contrary,  the  characteristic 
feature  of  a  structure  like  that  I  have  suggested  is  the  intimate 
coupling  between  the  motions  of  the  electrons  in  the  various  groups 
characterized  by  different  quantum  numbers,  as  well  as  the  greater 
independence  in  the  mode  of  binding  within  one  and  the  same  group 
of  electrons  the  orbits  of  which  are  characterized  by  the  same 
quantum  number.  In  emphasizing  this  last  feature  I  have  two 
points  in  mind.  Firstly  the  smaller  effect  of  the  presence  of  pre- 
viously bound  electrons  on  the  firmness  of  binding  of  succeeding 
electrons  in  the  same  group.  Secondly  the  way  in  which  the  motions 
of  the  electrons  within  the  group  reflect  the  independence  both  of 
the  processes  by  which  the  group  can  be  formed  and  by  which  it 
can  be  reorganized  by  change  of  position  of  the  different  electrons 
in  the  atom  after  a  disturbance  by  external  forces.  The  last  point 
will  be  considered  more  closely  when  we  deal  with  the  origin  and 
nature  of  the  X-ray  spectra;  for  the  present  we  shall  continue  the 
consideration  of  the  structure  of  the  atom  to  which  we  are  led  by 
the  investigation  of  the  processes  connected  with  the  successive 
capture  of  the  electrons. 

The  preceding  considerations  enable  us  to  understand  the  fact 
that  the  two  elements  beryllium  and  boron  immediately  succeeding 
lithium  can  appear  electropositively  with  2  and  3  valencies  respec- 
tively in  combination  with  other  substances.  For  like  the  third 
electron  in  the  lithium  atom,  the  last  captured  electrons  in  these 
elements  will  be  much  more  lightly  bound  than  the  first  two 
electrons.  At  the  same  time  we  understand  why  the  electropositive 
character  of  these  elements  is  less  marked  than  in  the  case  of 
lithium,  since  the  electrons  in  the  2-quanta  orbits  will  be  much 
more  firmly  bound  on  account  of  the  stronger  field  in  which  they 
are  moving.  New  conditions  arise,  however,  in  the  case  of  the 
next  element,  carbon,  as  this  element  in  its  typical  chemical  com- 
binations can  not  be  supposed  to  occur  as  an  ion,  but  rather  as  a 


PHYSICAL  AND  CHEMICAL  PROPERTIES  OF  THE  ELEMENTS       93 

neutral  atom.  This  must  be  assumed  to  be  due  not  only  to  the  great 
firmness  in  the  binding  of  the  electrons  but  also  to  be  an  essential 
consequence  of  the  symmetrical  configuration  of  the  electrons. 

With  the  binding  of  the  4th,  5th  and  6th  electrons  in  2l  orbits, 
the  spatial  symmetry  of  the  regular  configuration  of  the  orbits 
must  be  regarded  as  steadily  increasing,  until  with  the  binding  of 
the  6th  electron  the  orbits  of  the  four  last  bound  electrons  may  be 
expected  to  form  an  exceptionally  symmetrical  configuration  in 
which  the  normals  to  the  planes  of  the  orbits  occupy  positions 
relative  to  one  another  nearly  the  same  as  the  lines  from  the  centre 
to  the  vertices  of  a  regular  tetrahedron.  Such  a  configuration 
of  groups  of  2-quanta  orbits  in  the  carbon  atom  seems  capable 
of  furnishing  a  suitable  foundation  for  explaining  the  structure  of 
organic  compounds.  I  shall  not  discuss  this  question  any  further, 
for  it  would  require  a  thorough  study  of  the  interaction  between 
the  motions  of  the  electrons  in  the  atoms  forming  the  molecule. 
I  might  mention,  however,  that  the  types  of  molecular  models  to 
which  we  are  led  are  very  different  from  the  molecular  models 
which  were  suggested  in  my  first  papers.  In  these  the  chemical 
"valence  bonds"  were  represented  by  "electron  rings"  of  the  same 
type  as  those  which  were  assumed  to  compose  the  groups  of 
electrons  within  the  individual  atoms.  It  is  nevertheless  possible 
to  give  a  general  explanation  of  the  chemical  properties  of  the 
elements  without  touching  on  those  matters  at  all.  This  is  largely 
due  to  the  fact  that  the  structures  of  combinations  of  atoms  of  the 
same  element  and  of  many  organic  compounds  do  not  have  the 
same  significance  for  our  purpose  as  those  molecular  structures  in 
which  the  individual  atoms  occur  as  electrically  charged  ions.  The 
latter  kind  of  compounds,  to  which  the  greater  number  of  simple 
inorganic  compounds  belong,  is  frequently  called  "heteropolar"  and 
possesses  a  far  more  typical  character  than  the  first  compounds 
which  are  called  "homoeopolar,"  and  whose  properties  to  quite  a 
different  degree  exhibit  the  individual  peculiarities  of  the  elements. 
My  main  purpose  will  therefore  be  to  consider  the  fitness  which 
the  configurations  of  the  electrons  in  the  various  atoms  offer  for 
the  formation  of  ions. 

Before  leaving  the  carbon  atom  I  should  mention,  that  a  model 
of  this  atom  in  which  the  orbits  of  the  four  most  lightly  bound 


94          THE  STRUCTURE  OF  THE  ATOM  AND  THE 

electrons  possess  a  pronounced  tetrahedric  symmetry  had  already 
been  suggested  by  Landed  In  order  to  agree  with  the  measurements 
of  the  size  of  the  atoms  he  also  assumed  that  these  electrons  moved 
in  2j  orbits.  There  is,  however,  this  difference  between  Lande's 
view  and  that  given  here,  that  while  Lande  deduced  the  character- 
istic properties  of  the  carbon  atom  solely  from  an  investigation  of 
the  simplest  form  of  motion  which  four  electrons  can  execute 
employing  spatial  symmetry,  our  view  originates  from  a  considera- 
tion of  the  stability  of  the  whole  atom.  For  our  assumptions  about 
the  orbits  of  the  electrons  are  based  directly  on  an  investigation  of 
the  interaction  between  these  electrons  and  the  first  two  bound 
electrons.  The  result  is  that  our  model  of  the  carbon  atom  has 
dynamic  properties  which  are  essentially  different  from  the  proper- 
ties of  Lande's  model. 

In  order  to  account  for  the  properties  of  the  elements  in  the  second 
half  of  the  second  period  it  will  first  of  all  be  necessary  to  show 
why  the  configuration  of  ten  electrons  occurring  in  the  neutral  atom 
of  neon  possesses  such  a  remarkable  degree  of  stability.  Previously 
it  has  been  assumed  that  the  properties  of  this  configuration  were 
due  to  the  interaction  between  eight  electrons  which  moved  in 
equivalent  orbits  outside  the  nucleus  and  an  inner  group  of  two 
electrons  like  that  in  the  helium  atom.  It  will  be  seen,  however, 
that  the  solution  must  be  sought  in  an  entirely  different  direction. 
It  can  not  be  expected  that  the  7th  electron  will  be  bound  in  a  2X  orbit 
equivalent  to  the  orbits  of  the  four  preceding  electrons.  The  occur- 
rence of  five  such  orbits  would  so  definitely  destroy  the  symmetry 
in  the  interaction  of  these  electrons  that  it  is  inconceivable  that  a 
process  resulting  in  the  accession  of  a  fifth  electron  to  this  group 
would  be  in  agreement  with  the  correspondence  principle.  On  the 
contrary  it  will  be  necessary  to  assume  that  the  four  electrons  in 
their  exceptionally  symmetrical  orbital  configuration  will  keep  out 
later  captured  electrons  with  the  result  that  these  electrons  will  be 
bound  in  orbits  of  other  types. 

The  orbits  which  come  into  consideration  for  the  7th  electron  in 
the  nitrogen  atom  and  the  7th,  8th,  9th  and  10th  electrons  in  the 
atoms  of  the  immediately  following  elements  will  be  circular  orbits 
of  the  type  22.  The  diameters  of  these  orbits  are  considerably  larger 
than  those  of  the  lj  orbits  of  the  first  two  electrons ;  on  the  other 


PHYSICAL  AND  CHEMICAL  PROPERTIES  OF  THE  ELEMENTS       95 

hand  the  outermost  part  of  the  excentric  2X  orbits  will  extend  some 
distance  beyond  these  circular  22  orbits.  I  shall  not  here  discuss  the 
capture  and  binding  of  these  electrons.  This  requires  a  further  in- 
vestigation of  the  interaction  between  the  motions  of  the  electrons 
in  the  two  types  of  2-quanta  orbits.  I  shall  simply  mention,  that 
in  the  atom  of  neon  in  which  we  will  assume  that  there  are  four 
electrons  in  22  orbits  the  planes  of  these  orbits  must  be  regarded  not 
only  as  occupying  a  position  relative  to  one  another  characterized 
by  a  high  degree  of  spatial  symmetry,  but  also  as  possessing  a 
configuration  harmonizing  with  the  four  elliptical  2!  orbits.  An 
interaction  of  this  kind  in  which  the  orbital  planes  do  not 
coincide  can  be  attained  only  if  the  configurations  in  both  sub- 
groups exhibit  a  systematic  deviation  from  tetrahedral  symmetry. 
This  will  have  the  result  that  the  electron  groups  with  2-quanta 
•orbits  in  the  neon  atom  will  have  only  a  single  axis  of  symmetry 
which  must  be  supposed  to  coincide  with  the  axis  of  symmetry  of 
the  innermost  group  of  two  electrons. 

Before  leaving  the  description  of  the  elements  within  the  second 
period  it  may  be  pointed  out  that  the  above  considerations  offer  a 
basis  for  interpreting  that  tendency  of  the  neutral  atoms  of  oxygen 
.and  fluorine  for  capturing  further  electrons  which  is  responsible  for 
the  marked  electronegative  character  of  these  elements.  In  fact, 
this  tendency  may  be  ascribed  to  the  fact  that  the  orbits  of 
the  last  captured  electrons  will  find  their  place  within  the  region, 
in  which  the  previously  captured  electrons  move  in  2j  orbits.  This 
.suggests  an  explanation  of  the  great  difference  between  the  pro- 
perties of  the  elements  in  the  latter  half  of  the  second  period  of  the 
periodic  system  and  those  of  the  elements  in  the  first  half,  in  whose 
atoms  there  is  only  a  single  type  of  2-quanta  orbits. 

Third  Period.  Sodium — Argon.  We  shall  now  consider  the 
structure  of  atoms  of  elements  in  the  third  period  of  the  periodic 
system.  This  brings  us  immediately  to  the  question  of  the  binding 
of  the  llth  electron  in  the  atom.  Here  we  meet  conditions  which 
in  some  respects  are  analogous  to  those  connected  with  the  binding 
of  the  7th  electron.  The  same  type  of  argument  that  applied  to 
the  carbon  atom  shows  that  the  symmetry  of  the  configuration  in 
the  neon  atom  would  be  essentially,  if  not  entirely,  destroyed  by 


96          THE  STRUCTURE  OF  THE  ATOM  AND  THE 

the  addition  of  another  electron  in  an  orbit  of  the  same  type  as 
that  in  which  the  last  captured  electrons  were  bound.  Just  as  in 
the  case  of  the  3rd  and  7th  electrons  we  may  therefore  expect  to 
meet  a  new  type  of  orbit  for  the  llth  electron  in  the  atom,  and  the 
orbits  which  present  themselves  this  time  are  the  3X  orbits.  An 
electron  in  such  an  orbit  will  for  the  greater  part  of  the  time  remain 
outside  the  orbits  of  the  first  ten  electrons.  But  at  certain  moments 
during  the  revolution  it  will  penetrate  not  only  into  the  region  of 
the  2-quanta  orbits,  but  like  the  2X  orbits  it  will  penetrate  to 
distances  from  the  nucleus  which  are  smaller  than  the  radii  of 
the  1-quantum  orbits  of  the  two  electrons  first  bound.  This  fact, 
which  has  a  most  important  bearing  on  the  stability  of  the  atom, 
leads  to  a  peculiar  result  as  regards  the  binding  of  the  llth  electron. 
In  the  sodium  atom  this  electron  will  move  in  a  field  which  so  far 
as  the  outer  part  of  the  orbit  is  concerned  deviates  only  very  little 
from  that  surrounding  the  nucleus  in  the  hydrogen  atom,  but  the 
dimensions  of  this  part  of  the  orbit  will,  nevertheless,  be  essentially 
different  from  the  dimensions  of  the  corresponding  part  of  a  3j 
orbit  in  the  hydrogen  atom.  This  arises  from  the  fact,  that  even 
though  the  electron  only  enters  the  inner  configuration  of  the  first 
ten  electrons  for  short  intervals  during  its  revolution,  this  part  of 
the  orbit  will  nevertheless  exert  an  essential  influence  upon  the 
determination  of  the  principal  quantum  number.  This  is  directly 
related  to  the  fact  that  the  motion  of  the  electron  in  the  first  part 
of  the  orbit  deviates  only  a  little  from  the  motion  which  each  of 
the  previously  bound  electrons  in  2j  orbits  executes  during  a  com- 
plete revolution.  The  uncertainty  which  has  prevailed  in  the 
determination  of  the  quantum  numbers  for  the  stationary  states 
corresponding  to  a  spectrum  like  that  of  sodium  is  connected  with 
this.  This  question  has  been  discussed  by  several  physicists.  From 
a  comparison  of  the  spectral  terms  of  the  various  alkali  metals, 
Roschdestwensky  has  drawn  the  conclusion  that  the  normal  state 
does  not,  as  we  might  be  inclined  to  expect  a  priori,  correspond  to 
a  lj  orbit  as  shown  in  fig.  2  on  p.  79,  but  that  this  state  corre- 
sponds to  a  2l  orbit.  Schrodinger  has  arrived  at  a  similar  result 
in  an  attempt  to  account  for  the  great  difference  between  the 
S  terms  and  the  terms  in  the  P  and  D  series  of  the  alkali  spectra. 
He  assumes  that  the  "outer"  electron  in  the  states  corresponding 


PHYSICAL  AND  CHEMICAL  PROPERTIES  OF  THE  ELEMENTS       97 

to  the  S  terms — in  contrast  to  those  corresponding  to  the  P  and 
D  terms — penetrates  partly  into  the  region  of  the  orbits  of  the 
inner  electrons  during  the  course  of  its  revolution.  These  investi- 
gations contain  without  doubt  important  hints,  but  in  reality  the 
conditions  must  be  very  different  for  the  different  alkali  spectra. 
Instead  of  a  2,  orbit  as  in  lithium  we  must  thus  assume  for 
the  spectrum  of  sodium  not  only  that  the  first  spectral  term  in 
the  8  series  corresponds  to  a  3j  orbit,  but  also,  as  a  more  detailed 
consideration  shows,  that  the  first  term  in  the  P  series  corresponds 
not  to  a  22  orbit  as  indicated  in  fig.  2,  but  to  a  32  orbit.  If  the 
numbers  in  this  figure  were  correct,  it  would  require  among  other 
things  that  the  P  terms  should  be  smaller  than  the  hydrogen  terms 


(k-J) 
(k-fl 
<k-3) 


J  S     S  S        i 

Fig.  3. 

corresponding  to  the  same  principal  quantum  number.  This  would 
mean  that  the  average  effect  of  the  inner  electrons  could  be  described 
as  a  repulsion  greater  than  would  occur  if  their  total  electrical  charge 
were  united  in  the  nucleus.  This,  however,  can  not  be  expected  from 
our  view  of  atomic  structure.  The  fact  that  the  last  captured  electron, 
at  any  rate  for  low  values  of  &,  revolves  partly  inside  the  orbits  of  the 
previously  bound  electrons  will  on  the  contrary  involve  that  the 
presence  of  these  electrons  will  give  rise  to  a  virtual  repulsion 
which  is  considerably  smaller  than  that  which  would  be  due  to 
their  combined  charges.  Instead  of  the  curves  drawn  between 
points  in  fig.  2  which  represent  stationary  states  corresponding 
to  the  same  value  of  the  principal  quantum  number  running  from 
right  to  left,  we  obtain  curves  which  run  from  left  to  right,  as 
is  indicated  in  fig.  3.  The  stationary  states  are  labelled  with 
B.  7 


98  THE  STRUCTURE  OF  THE  ATOM  AND  THE 

quantum  numbers  corresponding  to  the  structure  I  have  described. 
According  to  the  view  underlying  fig.  2  the  sodium  spectrum 
might  be  described  simply  as  a  distorted  hydrogen  spectrum, 
whereas  according  to  fig.  3  there  is  not  only  distortion  but  also 
complete  disappearance  of  certain  terms  of  low  quantum  numbers. 
It  may  be  stated,  that  this  view  not  only  appears  to  offer  an  ex- 
planation of  the  magnitude  of  the  terms,  but  that  the  complexity 
of  the  terms  in  the  P  and  D  series  finds  a  natural  explanation  in 
the  deviation  of  the  configuration  of  the  ten  electrons  first  bound 
from  a  purely  central  symmetry.  This  lack  of  symmetry  has  its 
origin  in  the  configuration  of  the  two  innermost  electrons  and 
"transmits"  itself  to  the  outer  parts  of  the  atomic  structure,  since 
the  2j  orbits  penetrate  partly  into  the  region  of  these  electrons. 

This  view  of  the  sodium  spectrum  provides  at  the  same  time  an 
immediate  explanation  of  the  pronounced  electropositive  properties 
of  sodium,  since  the  last  bound  electron  in  the  sodium  atom  is  still 
more  loosely  bound  than  the  last  captured  electron  in  the  lithium 
atom.  In  this  connection  it  might  be  mentioned  that  the  increase 
in  atomic  volume  with  increasing  atomic  number  in  the  family  of 
the  alkali  metals  finds  a  simple  explanation  in  the  successively 
looser  binding  of  the  valency  electrons.  In  his  work  on  the  X-ray 
spectra  Sommerfeld  at  an  earlier  period  regarded  this  increase  in 
the  atomic  volumes  as  supporting  the  assumption  that  the  principal 
quantum  number  of  the  orbit  of  the  valency  electrons  increases  by 
unity  as  we  pass  from  one  metal  to  the  next  in  the  family.  His 
later  investigations  on  the  series  spectra  have  led  him,  however, 
definitely  to  abandon  this  assumption.  At  first  sight  it  might  also 
appear  to  entail  a  far  greater  increase  in  the  atomic  volume  than 
that  actually  observed.  A  simple  explanation  of  this  fact  is  how- 
ever afforded  by  realizing  that  the  orbit  of  the  electron  will  run 
partly  inside  the  region  of  the  inner  orbit  and  that  therefore  the 
"effective"  quantum  number  which  corresponds  to  the  outer  almost 
elliptical  loop  will  be  much  smaller  than  the  principal  quantum 
number,  by  which  the  whole  central  orbit  is  described.  It  may 
be  mentioned  that  Vegard  in  his  investigations  on  the  X-ray  spectra 
has  also  proposed  the  assumption  of  successively  increasing  quantum 
numbers  for  the  electronic  orbits  in  the  various  groups  of  the  atom, 
reckoned  from  the  nucleus  outward.  He  has  introduced  assumptions 


IV.  OF  MO.  LIBRARY 

PHYSICAL  AND  CHEMICAL  PROPERTIES  OF  THE  ELEMENTS       99 

about  the  relations  between  the  numbers  of  electrons  in  the  various 
groups  of  the  atom  and  the  lengths  of  the  periods  in  the  periodic 
system  which  exhibit  certain  formal  similarities  with  the  results 
presented  here.  But  Vegard's  considerations  do  not  offer  points  of 
departure  for  a  further  consideration  of  the  evolution  and  stability 
of  the  groups,  and  consequently  no  basis  for  a  detailed  interpretation 
of  the  properties  of  the  elements. 

When  we  consider  the  elements  following  sodium  in  the  third 
period  of  the  periodic  system  we  meet  in  the  binding  of  the  IZth, 
1.3th  and  l&th  electrons  conditions  which  are  analogous  to  those 
we  met  in  the  binding  of  the  4th,  5th  and  6th  electrons.  In  the 
elements  of  the  third  periods,  however,  we  possess  a  far  more 
detailed  knowledge  of  the  series  spectra.  Too  little  is  known 
about  the  beryllium  spectrum  to  draw  conclusions  about  the 
binding  of  the  fourth  electron,  but  we  may  infer  directly  from  the 
well-known  arc  spectrum  of  magnesium  that  the  12th  electron 
in  the  atom  of  this  element  is  bound  in  a  3j  orbit.  As  regards 
the  binding  of  the  13th  electron  we  meet  in  aluminium  an 
absorption  spectrum  different  in  structure  to  that  of  the  alkali 
metals.  In  fact  here  not  the  lines  of  the  principal  series  but  the 
lines  of  the  sharp  and  diffuse  series  are  absorption  lines.  Conse- 
quently it  is  the  first  member  of  the  P  terms  and  not  of  the  8 
terms  which  corresponds  to  the  normal  state  of  the  aluminium 
atom,  and  we  must  assume  that  the  13th  electron  is  bound  in 
a  32  orbit.  This,  however,  would  hardly  seem  to  be  a  general 
property  of  the  binding  of  the  13th  electron  in  atoms,  but  rather 
to  arise  from  the  special  conditions  for  the  binding  of  the  last 
electron  in  an  atom,  where  already  there  are  two  other  electrons 
bound  as  loosely  as  the  valency  electron  of  aluminium.  At  the 
present  state  of  the  theory  it  seems  best  to  assume  that  in  the 
silicon  atom  the  four  last  captured  electrons  will  move  in  3! 
orbits  forming  a  configuration  possessing  symmetrical  properties 
similar  to  the  outer  configuration  of  the  four  electrons  in  2j  orbits 
in  carbon.  Like  what  we  assumed  for  the  latter  configuration  we 
shall  expect  that  the  configuration  of  the  3!  orbits  occurring  for  the 
first  time  in  silicon  possesses  such  a  completion,  that  the  addition 
of  a  further  electron  in  a  3j  orbit  to  the  atom  of  the  following  ele- 
ments is  impossible,  and  that  the  15th  electron  in  the  elements  of 

7—2 


100         THE  STRUCTURE  OF  THE  ATOM  AND  THE 

higher  atomic  number  will  be  bound  in  a  new  type  of  orbit.  In  this 
case,  however,  the  orbits  with  which  we  meet  will  not  be  circular, 
as  in  the  capture  of  the  7th  electron,  but  will  be  rotating  excentric 
orbits  of  the  type  32.  This  is  very  closely  related  to  the  fact,  men- 
tioned above,  that  the  non-circular  orbits  will  correspond  to  a 
firmer  binding  than  the  circular  orbits  having  the  same  value  for 
the  principal  quantum  number,  since  the  electrons  will  at  certain 
moments  penetrate  much  farther  into  the  interior  of  the  atom. 
Even  though  a  32  orbit  will  not  penetrate  into  the  innermost  con- 
figuration of  l!  orbits,  it  will  penetrate  to  distances  from  the  nucleus 
which  are  considerably  less  than  the  radii  of  the  circular  22  orbits. 
In  the  case  of  the  16th,  17th  and  18th  electrons  the  conditions  are 
similar  to  those  for  the  15th.  So  for  argon  we  may  expect  a  con- 
figuration in  which  the  ten  innermost  electrons  move  in  orbits  of 
the  same  type  as  in  the  neon  atom  while  the  last  eight  electrons  will 
form  a  configuration  of  four  3j  orbits  and  four  32  orbits,  whose 
symmetrical  properties  must  be  regarded  as  closely  corresponding 
to  the  configuration  of  2-quanta  orbits  in  the  neon  atom.  At  the 
same  time,  as  this  picture  suggests  a  qualitative  explanation  of  the 
similarity  of  the  chemical  properties  of  the  elements  in  the  latter 
part  of  the  second  and  third  periods,  it  also  opens  up  the  possibility 
of  a  natural  explanation  of  the  conspicuous  difference  from  a 
quantitative  aspect. 

Fourth  Period.  Potassium — Krypton.  In  the  fourth  period 
we  meet  at  first  elements  which  resemble  chemically  those  at  the 
beginning  of  the  two  previous  periods.  This  is  also  what  we  should 
expect.  We  must  thus  assume  that  the  19th  electron  is  bound  in 
a  new  type  of  orbit,  and  a  closer  consideration  shows  that  this  will 
be  a  4j  orbit.  The  points  which  were  emphasized  in  connection 
with  the  binding  of  the  last  electron  in  the  sodium  atom  will  be 
even  more  marked  here  on  account  of  the  larger  quantum  number 
by  which  the  orbits  of  the  inner  electrons  are  characterized.  In 
fact,  in  the  potassium  atom  the  4j  orbit  of  the  19th  electron  will, 
as  far  as  inner  loops  are  concerned,  coincide  closely  with  the  shape 
of  a  3j  orbit.  On  this  account,  therefore,  the  dimensions  of  the 
outer  part  of  the  orbit  will  not  only  deviate  greatly  from  the 
dimensions  of  a  4i  orbit  in  the  hydrogen  atom,  but  will  coincide 


PHYSICAL  AND  CHEMICAL  PROPERTIES  OF  THE  ELEMENTS    101 

closely  with  a  hydrogen  orbit  of  the  type  2t,  the  dimensions  of 
which  are  about  four  times  smaller  than  the  4:  hydrogen  orbit. 
This  result  allows  an  immediate  explanation  of  the  main  features  of 
the  chemical  properties  and  the  spectrum  of  potassium.  Corre- 
sponding results  apply  to  calcium,  in  the  neutral  atom  of  which 
there  will  be  two  valency  electrons  in  equivalent  4t  orbits. 

After  calcium  the  properties  of  the  elements  in  the  fourth  period 
of  the  periodic  system  deviate,  however,  more  and  more  from  the 
corresponding  elements  in  the  previous  periods,  until  in  the  family 
of  the  iron  metals  we  meet  elements  whose  properties  are  essenti- 
ally different.  Proceeding  to  still  higher  atomic  numbers  we  again 
meet  different  conditions.  Thus  we  find  in  the  latter  part  of  the 
fourth  period  a  series  of  elements  whosechemical  properties  approach 
more  and  more  to  the  properties  of  the  elements  at  the  end 
of  the  preceding  periods,  until  finally  with  atomic  number  36  we 
again  meet  one  of  the  inactive  gases,  namely  krypton.  This  is 
exactly  what  we  should  expect.  The  formation  and  stability  of  the 
atoms  of  the  elements  in  the  first  three  periods  require  that  each 
of  the  first  18  electrons  in  the  atom  shall  be  bound  in  each  suc- 
ceeding element  in  an  orbit  of  the  same  principal  quantum  number 
as  that  possessed  by  the  particular  electron,  when  it  first  appeared. 
It  is  readily  seen  that  this  is  no  longer  the  case  for  the  19th 
electron.  With  increasing  nuclear  charge  and  the  consequent 
decrease  in  the  difference  between  the  fields  of  force  inside  and 
outside  the  region  of  the  orbits  of  the  first  18  bound  electrons,  the 
dimensions  of  those  parts  of  a  4X  orbit  which  fall  outside  will 
approach  more  and  more  to  the  dimensions  of  a  4-quantum  orbit 
calculated  on  the  assumption  that  the  interaction  between  the 
electrons  in  the  atom  may  be  neglected.  With  increasing  atomic 
number  a  point  will  therefore  be  reached  where  a  33  orbit  will  corre- 
spond to  a  firmer  binding  of  the  19th  electron  than  a  4X  orbit,  and 
this  occurs  as  early  as  at  the  beginning  of  the  fourth  period.  This 
cannot  only  be  anticipated  from  a  simple  calculation  but  is  confirmed 
in  a  striking  way  from  an  examination  of  the  series  spectra.  While 
the  spectrum  of  potassium  indicates  that  the  4!  orbit  corresponds 
to  a  binding  which  is  more  than  twice  as  firm  as  in  a  3Z  orbit 
corresponding  to  the  first  spectral  term  in  the  D  series,  the  con- 
ditions are  entirely  different  as  soon  as  calcium  is  reached.  We 


102 


THE  STRUCTURE  OF  THE  ATOM  AND  THE 


shall  not  consider  the  arc  spectrum  which  is  emitted  during  the 
capture  of  the  20th  electron  but  the  spark  spectrum  which  corre- 
sponds to  the  capture  and  binding  of  the  19th  electron.  While  the 
spark  spectrum  of  magnesium  exhibits  great  similarity  with  the 
sodium  spectrum  as  regards  the  values  of  the  spectral  terms  in  the 
various  series — apart  from  the  fact  that  the  constant  appearing  in 
formula  (12)  is  four  times  as  large  as  the  Rydberg  constant— we 
meet  in  the  spark  spectrum  of  calcium  the  remarkable  condition 


4 

T         '           ' 

j 

•     '•    [•••,     - 

No.    arc. 

* 

*--*f|-- 

1           1 

A 

•£ 

6,    \       ! 

4 

5"           &^ 

5,- 

J"*^    ' 

*    «~ 

i      ! 

a  A 

^ 

Afg    ^park 

*| 

i      i 

*••  — 

'?0_  —  ^0...|^.  

--±£Q____j£zQ.,.0  

C<z     iiea.rk 

!      i 

Fig.  4. 

that  the  first  term  of  the  D  series  is  larger  than  the  first  term  of 
the  P  series  and  is  only  a  little  smaller  than  the  first  term  of  the 
$  series,  which  may  be  regarded  as  corresponding  to  the  binding 
of  the  19th  electron  in  the  normal  state  of  the  calcium  atom. 
These  facts  are  shown  in  figure  4  which  gives  a  survey  of  the 
stationary  states  corresponding  to  the  arc  spectra  of  sodium  and 
potassium.  As  in  figures  2  and  3  of  the  sodium  spectrum,  we 
have  disregarded  the  complexity  of  the  spectral  terms,  and  the 
numbers  characterizingthe  stationary  states  are  simply  the  quantum 


PHYSICAL  AND  CHEMICAL  PROPERTIES  OF  THE  ELEMENTS    103 

numbers  n  and  k.  For  the  sake  of  comparison  the  scale  in  which  the 
energy  of  the  different  states  is  indicated  is  chosen  four  times  as 
small  for  the  spark  spectra  as  for  the  arc  spectra.  Consequently 
the  vertical  lines  indicated  with  various  values  of  n  correspond  for 
the  arc  spectra  to  the  spectral  terms  of  hydrogen,  for  the  spark 
spectra  to  the  terms  of  the  helium  spectrum  given  by  formula  (7). 
Comparing  the  change  in  the  relative  firmness  in  the  binding  of 
the  19th  electron  in  a  4X  and  33  orbit  for  potassium  and  calcium  we 
see  that  we  must  be  prepared  already  for  the  next  element, 
scandium,  to  find  that  the  33  orbit  will  correspond  to  a  stronger 
binding  of  this  electron  than  a  4j  orbit.  On  the  other  hand  it 
follows  from  previous  remarks  that  the  binding  will  be  much  lighter 
than  for  the  first  18  electrons  which  agrees  that  in  chemical  com- 
binations scandium  appears  electropositively  with  three  valencies. 

If  we  proceed  to  the  following  elements,  a  still  larger  number  of 
33  orbits  will  occur  in  the  normal  state  of  these  atoms,  since  the 
number  of  such  electron  orbits  will  depend  upon  the  firmness  of 
their  binding  compared  to  the  firmness  with  which  an  electron  is 
bound  in  a  4j  orbit,  in  which  type  of  orbit  at  least  the  last  captured 
electron  in  the  atom  may  be  assumed  to  move.  We  therefore  meet 
conditions  which  are  essentially  different  from  those  which  we  have 
considered  in  connection  with  the  previous  periods,  so  that  here 
we  have  to  do  with  the  successive  development  of  one  of  the  inner 
groups  of  electrons  in  the  atom,  in  this  case  with  groups  of  electrons 
in  3-quanta  orbits.  Only  when  the  development  of  this  group  has 
been  completed  may  we  expect  to  find  once  more  a  corresponding 
change  in  the  properties  of  the  elements  with  increasing  atomic 
number  such  as  we  find  in  the  preceding  periods.  The  properties 
of  the  elements  in  the  latter  part  of  the  fourth  period  show 
immediately  that  the  group,  when  completed,  will  possess  18 
electrons.  Thus  in  krypton,  for  example,  we  may  expect  besides 
the  groups  of  1,  2  and  3-quanta  orbits  a  markedly  symmetrical 
configuration  of  8  electrons  in  4-quanta  orbits  consisting  of  four  4j 
orbits  and  four  42  orbits. 

The  question  now  arises :  In  which  way  will  the  gradual  forma- 
tion of  the  group  of  electrons  having  3-quanta  orbits  take  place  ? 
From  analogy  with  the  constitution  of  the  groups  of  electrons  with 
2-quanta  orbits  we  might  at  first  sight  be  inclined  to  suppose  that 


104         THE  STRUCTURE  OF  THE  ATOM  AND  THE 

the  complete  group  of  3-quanta  orbits  would  consist  of  three  sub- 
groups of  four  electrons  each  in  orbits  of  the  types  3X,  34  and  3S 
respectively,  so  that  the  total  number  of  electrons  would  be  12 
instead  of  18.  Further  consideration  shows,  however,  that  such  an 
expectation  would  not  be  justified.  The  stability  of  the  configura- 
tion of  eight  electrons  with  2-quanta  orbits  occurring  in  neon  must 
be  ascribed  not  only  to  the  symmetrical  configuration  of  the  elec- 
tronic orbits  in  the  two  subgroups  of  2a  and  22  orbits  respectively, 
but  fully  as  much  to  the  possibility  ofbringing  the  orbits  inside  these 
subgroups  into  harmonic  relation  with  one  another.  The  situation 
is  different,  however,  for  the  groups  of  electrons  with  3-quanta 
orbits.  Three  subgroups  of  four  orbits  each  can  not  in  this  case  be 
expected  to  come  into  interaction  with  one  another  in  a  corre- 
spondingly simple  manner.  On  the  contrary  we  must  assume  that 
the  presence  of  electrons  in  33  orbits  will  diminish  the  harmony  of 
the  orbits  within  the  first  two  3-quanta  subgroups,  at  any  rate 
when  a  point  is  reached  where  the  19th  electron  is  no  longer,  as 
was  the  case  with  scandium,  bound  considerably  more  lightly  than 
the  previously  bound  electrons  in  3-quanta  orbits,  but  has  been 
drawn  so  far  into  the  atom  that  it  revolves  within  essentially 
the  same  region  of  the  atom  where  these  electrons  move.  We 
shall  now  assume  that  this  decrease  in  the  harmony  will  so  to 
say  "open"  the  previously  "closed"  configuration  of  electrons 
in  orbits  of  these  types.  As  regards  the  final  result,  the  number 
18  indicates  that  after  the  group  is  finally  formed  there  will 
be  three  subgroups  containing  six  electrons  each.  Even  if  it  has 
not  at  present  been  possible  to  follow  in  detail  the  various 
steps  in  the  formation  of  the  group  this  result  is  nevertheless 
confirmed  in  an  interesting  manner  by  the  fact  that  it  is  possible 
to  arrange  three  configurations  having  six  electrons  each  in  a  simple 
manner  relative  to  one  another.  The  configuration  of  the  subgroups 
does  not  exhibit  a  tetrahedral  symmetry  like  the  groups  of  2-quanta 
orbits  in  carbon,  but  a  symmetry  which,  so  far  as  the  relative 
orientation  of  the  normals  to  the  planes  of  the  orbits  is  con- 
cerned, may  be  described  as  trigonal. 

In  spite  of  the  great  difference  in  the  properties  of  the  elements 
of  this  period,  compared  with  those  of  the  preceding  period,  the 
completion  of  the  group  of  18  electrons  in  3-quanta  orbits  in  the 


PHYSICAL  AND  CHEMICAL  PROPERTIES  OF  THE  ELEMENTS    105 

fourth  period  may  to  a  certain  extent  be  said  to  have  the  same 
characteristic  results  as  the  completion  of  the  group  of  2-quanta 
orbits  in  the  second  period.  As  we  have  seen,  this  determined  not 
only  the  properties  of  neon  as  an  inactive  gas,  but  in  addition  the 
electronegative  properties  of  the  preceding  elements  and  the 
electropositive  properties  of  the  elements  which  follow.  The  fact 
that  there  is  no  inactive  gas  possessing  an  outer  group  of  18 
electrons  is  very  easily  accounted  for  by  the  much  larger  dimensions 
which  a  33  orbit  has  in  comparison  with  a  22  orbit  revolving  in  the 
same  field  of  force.  On  this  account  a  complete  3-quanta  group 
can  not  occur  as  the  outermost  group  in  a  neutral  atom,  but  only 
in  positively  charged  ions.  The  characteristic  decrease  in  valency 
which  we  meet  in  copper,  shown  by  the  appearance  of  the  singly 
charged  cuprous  ions,  indicates  the  same  tendency  towards  the 
completion  of  a  symmetrical  configuration  of  electrons  that  we 
found  in  the  marked  electronegative  character  of  an  element  like 
fluorine.  Direct  evidence  that  a  complete  group  of  3-quanta  orbits 
is  present  in  the  cuprous  ion  is  given  by  the  spectrum  of  copper 
which,  in  contrast  to  the  extremely  complicated  spectra  of  the 
preceding  elements  resulting  from  the  unsymmetrical  character  of 
the  inner  system,  possesses  a  simple  structure  very  much  like  that 
of  the  sodium  spectrum.  This  may  no  doubt  be  ascribed  to  a 
simple  symmetrical  structure  present  in  the  cuprous  ion  similar  to 
that  in  the  sodium  ion,  although  the  great  difference  in  the  con- 
stitution of  the  outer  group  of  electrons  in  these  ions  is  shown 
both  by  the  considerable  difference  in  the  values  of  the  spectral 
terms  and  in  the  separation  of  the  doublets  in  the  P  terms  of  the 
two  spectra.  The  occurrence  of  the  cupric  compounds  shows,  how- 
ever, that  the  firmness  of  binding  in  the  group  of  3-quanta  orbits 
in  the  copper  atom  is  not  as  great  as  the  firmness  with  which  the 
electrons  are  bound  in  the  group  of  2-quanta  orbits  in  the  sodium 
atom.  Zinc,  which  is  always  divalent,  is  the  first  element  in  which 
the  groups  of  the  electrons  are  so  firmly  bound  that  they  can  not 
be  removed  by  ordinary  chemical  processes. 

The  picture  I  have  given  of  the  formation  and  structure  of  the 
atoms  of  the  elements  in  the  fourth  period  gives  an  explanation  of 
the  chemical  and  spectral  properties.  In  addition  it  is  supported 
by  evidence  of  a  different  nature  to  that  which  we  have  hitherto 


106         THE  STRUCTURE  OF  THE  ATOM  AND  THE 

used.  It  is  a  familiar  fact,  that  the  elements  in  the  fourth  period 
differ  markedly  from  the  elements  in  the  preceding  periods 
partly  in  their  magnetic  properties  and  partly  in  the  characteristic 
colours  of  their  compounds.  Paramagnetism  and  colours  do  occur 
in  elements  belonging  to  the  foregoing  periods,  but  not  in  simple 
compounds  where  the  atoms  considered  enter  as  ions.  Many 
elements  of  the  fourth  period,  on  the  contrary,  exhibit  paramag- 
netic properties  and  characteristic  colours  even  in  dissociated 
aqueous  solutions.  The  importance  of  this  has  been  emphasized 
by  Ladenburg  in  his  attempt  to  explain  the  properties  of  the 
elements  in  the  long  periods  of  the  periodic  system  (see  p.  73). 
Langmuir  in  order  to  account  for  the  difference  between  the  fourth 
period  and  the  preceding  periods  simply  assumed  that  the  atom, 
in  addition  to  thelayers  of  cells  containing  8  electrons  each,  possesses 
an  outer  layer  of  cells  with  room  for  18  electrons  which  is  com- 
pletely filled  for  the  first  time  in  the  case  of  krypton.  Ladenburg, 
on  the  other  hand,  assumes  that  for  some  reason  or  other  an 
intermediate  layer  is  developed  between  the  inner  electronic 
configuration  in  the  atom  appearing  already  in  argon,  and  the 
external  group  of  valency  electrons.  This  layer  commences  with 
scandium  and  is  completed  exactly  at  the  end  of  the  family  of  iron 
metals.  In  support  of  this  assumption  Ladenburg  not  only  mentions 
the  chemical  properties  of  the  elements  in  the  fourth  period,  but 
also  refers  to  the  paramagnetism  and  colours  which  occur  exactly 
in  the  elements,  where  this  intermediate  layer  should  be  in 
development.  It  is  seen  that  Ladenburg's  ideas  exhibit  certain 
formal  similarities  with  the  interpretation  I  have  given  above  of 
the  appearance  of  the  fourth  period,  and  it  is  interesting  to  note  that 
our  view,  based  on  a  direct  investigation  of  the  conditions  for  the 
formation  of  the  atoms,  enables  us  to  understand  the  relation 
emphasized  by  Ladenburg. 

Our  ordinary  electrodynamic  conceptions  are  probably  insufficient 
to  form  a  basis  for  an  explanation  of  atomic  magnetism.  This  is 
hardly  to  be  wondered  at  when  we  remember  that  they  have  not 
proved  adequate  to  account  for  the  phenomena  of  radiation  which 
are  connected  with  the  intimate  interaction  between  the  electric 
and  magnetic  forces  arising  from  the  motion  of  the  electrons.  In 
whatever  way  these  difficulties  may  be  solved  it  seems  simplest  to 


PHYSICAL  AND  CHEMICAL  PROPERTIES  OF  THE  ELEMENTS    107 

assume  that  the  occurrence  of  magnetism,  such  as  we  meet  in  the 
elements  of  the  fourth  period,  results  from  a  lack  of  symmetry  in 
the  internal  structure  of  the  atom,  thus  preventing  the  magnetic 
forces  arising  from  the  motion  of  the  electrons  from  forming  a 
system  of  closed  lines  of  force  running  wholly  within  the  atom. 
While  it  has  been  assumed  that  the  ions  of  the  elements  in  the 
previous  periods,  whether  positively  or  negatively  charged,  contain 
configurations  of  marked  symmetrical  character,  we  must,  however, 
be  prepared  to  encounter  a  definite  lack  of  symmetry  in  the 
electronic  configurations  in  ions  of  those  elements  within  the  fourth 
period  which  contain  a  group  of  electrons  in  3-quanta  orbits  in  the 
transition  stage  between  symmetrical  configurations  of  8  and  18 
electrons  respectively.  As  pointed  out  by  Kossel,  the  experimental 
results  exhibit  an  extreme  simplicity,  the  magnetic  moment  of  the 
ions  depending  only  on  the  number  of  electrons  in  the  ion.  Ferric 
ions,  for  example,  exhibit  the  same  atomic  magnetism  as  manganous 
ions,  while  manganic  ions  exhibit  the  same  atomic  magnetism  as 
chromous  ions.  It  is  in  beautiful  agreement  with  what  we  have 
assumed  about  the  structure  of  the  atoms  of  copper  and  zinc,  that 
the  magnetism  disappears  with  those  ions  containing  28  electrons 
which,  as  I  stated,  must  be  assumed  to  contain  a  complete  group 
of  3-quanta  orbits.  On  the  whole  a  consideration  of  the  magnetic 
properties  of  the  elements  within  the  fourth  period  gives  us  a  vivid 
impression  of  how  a  wound  in  the  otherwise  symmetrical  inner 
structure  is  first  developed  and  then  healed  as  we  pass  from  element 
to  element.  It  is  to  be  hoped  that  a  further  investigation  of  the 
magnetic  properties  will  give  us  a  clue  to  the  way  in  which  the 
group  of  electrons  in  3-quanta  orbits  is  developed  step  by  step. 

Also  the  colours  of  the  ions  directly  support  our  view  of  atomic 
structure.  According  to  the  postulates  of  the  quantum  theory 
absorption  as  well  as  emission  of  radiation  is  regarded  as  taking 
place  during  transitions  between  stationary  states.  The  occurrence 
of  colours,  that  is  to  say  the  absorption  of  light  in  the  visible  region 
of  the  spectrum,  is  evidence  of  transitions  involving  energy  changes 
of  the  same  order  of  magnitude  as  those  giving  the  usual  optical 
spectra  of  the  elements.  In  contrast  to  the  ions  of  the  elements  of 
the  preceding  periods  where  all  the  electrons  are  assumed  to  be  very 
firmly  bound,  the  occurrence  of  such  processes  in  the  fourth  period 


108         THE  STRUCTURE  OF  THE  ATOM  AND  THE 

is  exactly  what  we  should  expect.  For  the  development  and  com- 
pletion of  the  electronic  groups  with  3-quanta  orbits  will  proceed, 
so  to  say,  in  competition  with  the  binding  of  electrons  in  orbits  of 
higher  quanta,  since  the  binding  of  electrons  in  3-quanta  orbits 
occurs  when  the  electrons  in  these  orbits  are  bound  more  firmly 
than  electrons  in  4j  orbits.  The  development  of  the  group  will 
therefore  proceed  to  the  point  where  we  may  say  there  is  equili- 
brium between  the  two  kinds  of  orbits.  This  condition  may  be 
assumed  to  be  intimately  connected  not  only  with  the  colour  of  the 
ions,  but  also  with  the  tendency  of  the  elements  to  form  ions  with 
different  valencies.  This  is  in  contrast  to  the  elements  of  the  first 
periods  where  the  charge  of  the  ions  in  aqueous  solutions  is  always 
the  same  for  one  and  the  same  element. 

Fifth  Period.  Rubidium — Xenon.  The  structure  of  the  atoms 
in  the  remaining  periods  may  be  followed  up  in  complete  analogy 
with  what  has  already  been  said.  Thus  we  shall  assume  that  the 
37th  and  38th  electrons  in  the  elements  of  the  fifth  period  are 
bound  in  5j  orbits.  This  is  supported  by  the  measurements  of  the 
arc  spectrum  of  rubidium  and  the  spark  spectrum  of  strontium. 
The  latter  spectrum  indicates  at  the  same  time  that  43  orbits  will 
soon  appear,  and  therefore  in  this  period,  which  like  the  4th 
contains  18  elements,  we  must  assume  that  we  are  witnessing  a 
farther  stage  in  the  development  of  the  electronic  group  of  ^-quanta 
orbits.  The  first  stage  in  the  formation  of  this  group  may  be  said 
to  have  been  attained  in  krypton  with  the  appearance  of  a  sym- 
metrical configuration  of  eight  electrons  consisting  of  two  subgroups 
each  of  four  electrons  in  4j  and  42  orbits.  A  second  preliminary 
completion  must  be  regarded  as  having  been  reached  with  the 
appearance  of  a  symmetrical  configuration  of  18  electrons  in  the 
case  of  silver,  consisting  of  three  subgroups  with  six  electrons  each 
in  orbits  of  the  types  41(  42  and  43.  Everything  that  has  been  said 
about  the  successive  formation  of  the  group  of  electrons  with  3- 
quanta  orbits  applies  unchanged  to  this  stage  in  the  transformation 
of  the  group  with  4-quanta  orbits.  For  in  no  case  have  we  made 
use  of  the  absolute  values  of  the  quantum  numbers  nor  of  assump- 
tions concerning  the  form  of  the  orbits  but  only  of  the  number  of 
possible  types  of  orbits  which  might  come  into  consideration.  At 


PHYSICAL  AND  CHEMICAL  PROPERTIES  OF  THE  ELEMENTS    109 

the  same  time  it  may  be  of  interest  to  mention  that  the  properties 
of  these  elements  compared  with  those  of  the  foregoing  period 
nevertheless  show  a  difference  corresponding  exactly  to  what  would 
be  expected  from  the  difference  in  the  types  of  orbits.  For  instance, 
the  divergencies  from  the  characteristic  valency  conditions  of  the 
elements  in  the  second  and  third  periods  appear  later  in  the  fifth 
period  than  for  elements  in  the  fourth  period.  While  an  element 
like  titanium  in  the  fourth  period  already  shows  a  marked  tendency 
to  occur  with  various  valencies,  on  the  other  hand  an  element  like 
zirconium  is  still  quadri-valent  like  carbon  in  the  second  period 
and  silicon  in  the  third.  A  simple  investigation  of  the  kinematic 
properties  of  the  orbits  of  the  electrons  shows  in  fact  that  an 
electron  in  an  excentric  43  orbit  of  an  element  in  the  fifth 
period  will  be  considerably  more  loosely  bound  than  an  electron  in 
a  circular  33  orbit  of  the  corresponding  element  in  the  fourth 
period,  while  electrons  which  are  bound  in  excentric  orbits  of  the 
types  5j  and  4j  respectively  will  correspond  to  a  binding  of  about 
the  same  firmness. 

At  the  end  of  the  fifth  period  we  may  assume  that  xenon,  the 
atomic  number  of  which  is  54,  has  a  structure  which  in  addition  to 
the  two  1 -quantum,  eight  2-quanta,  eighteen  3-quanta  and  eight- 
teen  4-quanta  orbits  already  mentioned  contains  a  symmetrical 
configuration  of  eight  electrons  in  5-quanta  orbits  consisting  of  two 
subgroups  with  four  electrons  each  in  5!  and  52  orbits  respectively. 

Sixth  Period.  Caesium — Niton.  If  we  now  consider  the  atoms 
of  elements  of  still  higher  atomic  number,  we  must  first  of  all 
assume  that  the  55th  and  56th  electrons  in  the  atoms  of  caesium 
and  barium  are  bound  in  Ql  orbits.  This  is  confirmed  by  the  spectra 
of  these  elements.  It  is  clear,  however,  that  we  must  be  prepared 
shortly  to  meet  entirely  new  conditions.  With  increasing  nuclear 
charge  we  shall  have  to  expect  not  only  that  an  electron  in  a  5, 
orbit  will  be  bound  more  firmly  than  in  a  6j  orbit,  but  we  must  also 
expect  that  a  moment  will  arrive  when  during  the  formation  of  the 
atom  a  44  orbit  will  represent  a  firmer  binding  of  the  electron  than 
an  orbit  of  5  or  6-quanta,  in  much  the  same  way  as  in  the  elements 
of  the  fourth  period  a  new  stage  in  the  development  of  the  3-quanta 
group  was  started  when  a  point  was  reached  where  for  the  first 


110         THE  STRUCTURE  OF  THE  ATOM  AND  THE 

time  the  19th  electron  was  bound  in  a  33  orbit  instead  of  in  a  4^ 
orbit.  We  shall  thus  expect  in  the  sixth  period  to  meet  with  a  new 
stage  in  the  development  of  the  group  with  4-quanta  orbits.  Once 
this  point  has  been  reached  we  must  be  prepared  to  find  with  in- 
creasing atomic  number  a  number  of  elements  following  one  another, 
which  as  in  the  family  of  the  iron  metals  have  very  nearly  the  same 
properties.  The  similarity  will,  however,  be  still  more  pronounced, 
since  in  this  case  we  are  concerned  with  the  successive  transforma- 
tion of  a  configuration  of  electrons  which  lies  deeper  in  the  interior 
of  the  atom.  You  will  have  already  guessed  that  what  I  have  in  view 
is  a  simple  explanation  of  the  occurrence  of  the  family  of  rare  earths 
at  the  beginning  of  the  sixth  period.  As  in  the  case  of  the  transforma- 
tion and  completion  of  the  group  of  3-quanta  orbits  in  the  fourth 
period  and  the  partial  completion  of  groups  of  4-quanta  orbits  in 
the  fifth  period,  we  may  immediately  deduce  from  the  length  of  the 
sixth  period  the  number  of  electrons,  namely  32,  which  are  finally 
contained  in  the  4-quanta  group  of  orbits.  Analogous  to  what 
applied  to  the  group  of  3-quanta  orbits  it  is  probable  that,  when 
the  group  is  completed,  it  will  contain  eight  electrons  in  each  of  the 
four  subgroups.  Even  though  it  has  not  yet  been  possible  to  follow 
the  development  of  the  group  step  by  step,  we  can  even  here  give 
some  theoretical  evidence  in  favour  of  the  occurrence  of  a  sym- 
metrical configuration  of  exactly  this  number  of  electrons.  I  shall 
simply  mention  that  it  is  not  possible  without  coincidence  of  the 
planes  of  the  orbits  to  arrive  at  an  interaction  between  four  sub- 
groups of  six  electrons  each  in  a  configuration  of  simple  trigonal 
symmetry,  which  is  equally  simple  as  that  shown  by  three  subgroups. 
The  difficulties  which  we  meet  make  it  probable  that  a  harmonic 
interaction  can  be  attained  precisely  by  four  groups  each  containing 
eight  electrons  the  orbital  configurations  of  which  exhibit  axial 
symmetry. 

Just  as  in  the  case  of  the  family  of  the  iron  metals  in  the  fourth 
period,  the  proposed  explanation  of  the  occurrence  of  the  family  of 
rare  earths  in  the  sixth  period  is  supported  in  an  interesting 
manner  by  an  investigation  of  the  magnetic  properties  of  these 
elements.  In  spite  of  the  great  chemical  similarity  the  members 
of  this  family  exhibit  very  different  magnetic  properties,  so  that 
while  some  of  them  exhibit  but  very  little  magnetism  others  exhibit 


PHYSICAL  AND  CHEMICAL  PROPERTIES  OF  THE  ELEMENTS    111 

a  greater  magnetic  moment  per  atom  than  any  other  element  which 
has  been  investigated.  It  is  also  possible  to  give  a  simple  interpre- 
tation of  the  peculiar  colours  exhibited  by  the  compounds  of  these 
elements  in  much  the  same  way  as  in  the  case  of  the  family  of  iron 
metals  in  the  fourth  period.  The  idea  that  the  appearance  of  the 
group  of  the  rare  earths  is  connected  with  the  development  of  inner 
groups  in  the  atom  is  not  in  itself  new  and  has  for  instance  been 
considered  by  Vegard  in  connection  with  his  work  on  X-ray  spectra. 
The  new  feature  of  the  present  considerations  lies,  however,  in  the 
emphasis  laid  on  the  peculiar  way  in  which  the  relative  strength  of 
the  binding  for  two  orbits  of  the  same  principal  quantum  number 
but  of  different  shapes  varies  with  the  nuclear  charge  and  with  the 
number  of  electrons  previously  bound.  Due  to  this  fact  the  presence 
of  a  group  like  that  of  the  rare  earths  in  the  sixth  period  may  be 
considered  as  a  direct  consequence  of  the  theory  and  might  actually 
have  been  predicted  on  a  quantum  theory,  adapted  to  the  explana- 
tion of  the  properties  of  the  elements  within  the  preceding  periods 
in  the  way  I  have  shown. 

Besides  the  final  development  of  the  group  of  ^-quanta  orbits  we 
observe  in  the  sixth  period  in  the  family  of  the  platinum  metals  the 
second  stage  in  the  development  of  the  group  of  5-quanta  orbits. 
Also  in  the  radioactive,  chemically  inactive  gas  niton,  which  com- 
pletes this  period,  we  observe  the  first  preliminary  step  in  the 
development  of  a  group  of  electrons  with  6-quanta  orbits.  In  the 
atom  of  this  element,  in  addition  to  the  groups  of  electrons  of  two 
1 -quantum,  eight  2-quanta,  eighteen  3-quanta,  thirty-two  4-quanta 
and  eighteen  5-quanta  orbits  respectively,  there  is  also  an  outer 
symmetrical  configuration  of  eight  electrons  in  6-quanta  orbits, 
which  we  shall  assume  to  consist  of  two  subgroups  with  four  electrons 
each  in  6j  and  62  orbits  respectively. 

Seventh  Period.  In  the  seventh  and  last  period  of  the  periodic 
system  we  may  expect  the  appearance  of  7-quanta  orbits  in  the 
normal  state  of  the  atom.  Thus  in  the  neutral  atom  of  radium  in 
addition  to  the  electronic  structure  of  niton  there  will  be  two 
electrons  in  ll  orbits  which  will  penetrate  during  their  revolution 
not  only  into  the  region  of  the  orbits  of  electrons  possessing  lower 
values  for  the  principal  quantum  number,  but  even  to  distances 


112         THE  STRUCTURE  OF  THE  ATOM  AND  THE 

from  the  nucleus  which  are  less  than  the  radii  of  the  orbits  of  the 
innermost  1-quantum  orbits.  The  properties  of  the  elements  in  the 
seventh  period  are  very  similar  to  the  properties  of  the  elements  in  the 
fifth  period.  Thus,  in  contrast  to  the  conditions  in  the  sixth  period, 
there  are  no  elements  whose  properties  resemble  one  another  like 
those  of  the  rare  earths.  In  exact  analogy  with  what  has  already 
been  said  about  the  relations  between  the  properties  of  the  elements 
in  the  fourth  and  fifth  periods  this  may  be  very  simply  explained  by 
the  fact  that  an  excentric  54  orbit  will  correspond  to  a  considerably 
looser  binding  of  an  electron  in  the  atom  of  an  element  of  the 
seventh  period  than  the  binding  of  an  electron  in  a  circular  44  orbit 
in  the  corresponding  element  of  the  sixth  period,  while  there  will  be 
a  much  smaller  difference  in  the  firmness  of  the  binding  of  these 
electrons  in  orbits  of  the  types  7a  and  6X  respectively. 

It  is  well  known  that  the  seventh  period  is  not  complete,  for  no  atom 
has  been  found  having  an  atomic  number  greater  than  92.  This  is 
probably  connected  with  the  fact  that  the  last  elements  in  the 
system  are  radioactive  and  that  nuclei  of  atoms  with  a  total  charge 
greater  than  92  will  not  be  sufficiently  stable  to  exist  under  con- 
ditions where  the  elements  can  be  observed.  It  is  tempting  to 
sketch  a  picture  of  the  atoms  formed  by  the  capture  and  binding 
of  electrons  around  nuclei  having  higher  charges,  and  thus  to 
obtain  some  idea  of  the  properties  which  the  corresponding  hypo- 
thetical elements  might  be  expected  to  exhibit.  I  shall  not  develop 
this  matter  further,  however,  since  the  general  results  we  should 
get  will  be  evident  to  you  from  the  views  I  have  developed  to 
explain  the  properties  of  the  elements  actually  observed.  A  survey 
of  these  results  is  given  in  the  following  table,  which  gives  a  sym- 
bolical representation  of  the  atomic  structure  of  the  inactive  gases 
which  complete  the  first  six  periods  in  the  periodic  system.  In 
order  to  emphasize  the  progressive  change  the  table  includes  the 
probable  arrangement  of  electrons  in  the  next  atom  which  would 
possess  properties  like  the  inactive  gases. 

The  view  of  atomic  constitution  underlying  this  table,  which 
involves  configurations  of  electrons  moving  with  large  velocities 
between  each  other,  so  that  the  electrons  in  the  "outer"  groups 
penetrate  into  the  region  of  the  orbits  of  the  electrons  of  the  "inner" 
groups,  is  of  course  completely  different  from  such  statical  models 


PHYSICAL  AND  CHEMICAL  PROPERTIES  OF  THE  ELEMENTS    113 


of  the  atom  as  are  proposed  by  Langmuir.  But  quite  apart  from  this 
it  will  be  seen  that  the  arrangement  of  the  electronic  groups  in 
the  atom,  to  which  we  have  been  lead  by  tracing  the  way  in  which 
each  single  electron  has  been  bound,  is  essentially  different  from 
the  arrangement  of  the  groups  in  Langmuir's  theory.  In  order  to 
explain  the  properties  of  the  elements  of  the  sixth  period  Langmuir 
assumes  for  instance  that,  in  addition  to  the  inner  layers  of  cells 
containing  2,  8,  8,  18  and  18  electrons  respectively,  which  are 
employed  to  account  for  the  properties  of  the  elements  in  the 
earlier  periods,  the  atom  also  possesses  a  layer  of  cells  with  room 
for  32  electrons  which  is  just  completed  in  the  case  of  niton. 


Element 

*: 
^ 

f/umber  of  Electrons   (n    n^-  orbits. 

1, 

2; 

2, 

4 

\ 

*> 

fj 

*• 

* 

* 

$ 

« 

4 

'• 

^ 

« 

4 

s> 

6* 

^ 

^ 

7, 

7, 

7, 

Htlium 
Nton 
Argon 
Krypton 
Xenon 
Niton 

2 

10 

n 

36 

S¥ 

36 

us 

I 
I 

I 
2 
2 
2. 

2 

* 

? 
4< 
* 
* 

V- 

y 
* 

* 

4 

• 

6 
<? 
£ 

8 

8 

4 
6 

8 

^ 

6 

J 

6 

<J 

<f 

- 

5 

6 

* 

v 
J 

6 
6 
6 

6 
6 
6 

6 

5 
6 

<5 
1 
g 

6 
g 

8 

In  this  connection  it  may  be  of  interest  to  mention  a  recent 
paper  by  Bury,  to  which  my  attention  was  first  drawn  after  the 
deliverance  of  this  address,  and  which  contains  an  interesting 
survey  of  the  chemical  properties  of  the  elements  based  on  similar 
conceptions  of  atomic  structure  as  those  applied  by  Lewis  and 
Langmuir.  From  purely  chemical  considerations  Bury  arrives  at 
conclusions  which  as  regards  the  arrangement  and  completion  of 
the  groups  in  the  main  coincide  with  those  of  the  present  theory, 
the  outlines  of  which  were  given  in  my  letters  to  Nature  mentioned 
in  the  introduction. 

Survey  of  the  periodic  table.  The  results  given  in  this  address 
are  also  illustrated  by  means  of  the  representation  of  the  periodic 
system  given  in  fig.  1.  In  this  figure  the  frames  are  meant  to 
indicate  such  elements  in  which  one  of  the  "  inner "  groups  is 
in  a  stage  of  development.  Thus  there  will  be  found  in  the 


114         THE  STRUCTURE  OF  THE  ATOM  AND  THE 

fourth  and  fifth  periods  a  single  frame  indicating  the  final  com- 
pletion of  the  electronic  group  with  3-quanta  orbits,  and  the 
last  stage  but  one  in  the  development  of  the  group  with  4-quanta 
orbits  respectively.  In  the  sixth  period  it  has  been  necessary  to 
introduce  two  frames,  of  which  the  inner  one  indicates  the  last 
stage  of  the  evolution  of  the  group  with  4-quanta  orbits,  giving  rise 
to  the  rare  earths.  This  occurs  at  a  place  in  the  periodic  system 
where  the  third  stage  in  the  development  of  an  electronic  group 
with  5-quanta  orbits,  indicated  by  the  outer  frame,  has  already 
begun.  In  this  connection  it  will  be  seen  that  the  inner  frame 
encloses  a  smaller  number  of  elements  than  is  usually  attributed 
to  the  family  of  the  rare  earths.  At  the  end  of  this  group  an 
uncertainty  exists,  due  to  the  fact  that  no  element  of  atomic 
number  72  is  known  with  certainty.  However,  as  indicated  in 
fig.  1,  we  must  conclude  from  the  theory  that  the  group  with 
4-quanta  orbits  is  finally  completed  in  lutetium  (71).  This  element 
therefore  ought  to  be  the  last  in  the  sequence  of  consecutive 
elements  with  similar  properties  in  the  first  half  of  the  sixth  period, 
and  at  the  place  72  an  element  must  be  expected  which  in  its 
chemical  and  physical  properties  is  homologous  with  zirconium  and 
thorium.  This,  which  is  already  indited  on  Julius  Thomsen's  old 
table,  has  also  been  pointed  out  by  Bury.  [Quite  recently  Dauvillier 
has  in  an  investigation  of  the  X-ray  spectrum  excited  in  preparations 
containing  rare  earths,  observed  certain  faint  lines  which  he  ascribes 
to  an  element  of  atomic  number  72.  This  element  is  identified  by 
him  as  the  element  celtium,  belonging  to  the  family  of  rare  earths, 
the  existence  of  which  had  previously  been  suspected  by  Urbain. 
Quite  apart  from  the  difficulties  which  this  result,  if  correct,  might 
entail  for  atomic  theories,  it  would,  since  the  rare  earths  according 
to  chemical  view  possess  three  valencies,  imply  a  rise  in  positive 
valency  of  two  units  when  passing  from  the  element  72  to  the 
next  element  73,  tantalum.  This  would  mean  an  exception  from 
the  otherwise  general  rule,  that  the  valency  never  increases  by 
more  than  one  unit  when  passing  from  one  element  to  the  next  in 
the  periodic  table  ]  In  the  case  of  the  incomplete  seventh  period 
the  full  drawn  frame  indicates  the  third  stage  in  the  development 
of  the  electronic  group  with  6-quanta  orbits,  which  must  begin  in 
actinium.  The  dotted  frame  indicates  the  last  stage  but  one  in 


PHYSICAL  AND  CHEMICAL  PROPERTIES  OF  THE  ELEMENTS    115 

the  development  of  the  group  with  5-quanta  orbits,  which  hitherto 
has  not  been  observed,  but  which  ought  to  begin  shortly  after 
uranium,  if  it  has  not  already  begun  in  this  element. 

With  reference  to  the  homology  of  the  elements  the  exceptional 
position  of  the  elements  enclosed  by  frames  in  fig.  1  is  further 
emphasized  by  taking  care  that,  in  spite  of  the  large  similarity 
many  elements  exhibit,  no  connecting  lines  are  drawn  between 
two  elements  which  occupy  different  positions  in  the  system  with 
respect  to  framing.  In  fact,  the  large  chemical  similarity  between, 
for  instance,  aluminium  and  scandium,  both  of  which  are  trivalent 
and  pronounced  electropositive  elements,  is  directly  or  indirectly 
emphasized  in  the  current  representations  of  the  periodic  table. 
While  this  procedure  is  justified  by  the  analogous  structure  of  the 
trivalent  ions  of  these  elements,  our  more  detailed  ideas  of  atomic 
structure  suggest,  however,  marked  differences  in  the  physical 
properties  of  aluminium  and  scandium,  originating  in  the  essenti- 
ally different  character  of  the  way  in  which  the  last  three  electrons 
in  the  neutral  atom  are  bound.  This  fact  gives  probably  a  direct 
explanation  of  the  marked  difference  existing  between  the  spectra 
of  aluminium  and  scandium.  Even  if  the  spectrum  of  scandium  is 
not  yet  sufficiently  cleared  up,  this  difference  seems  to  be  of  a  much 
more  fundamental  character  than  for  instance  the  difference  between 
the  arc  spectra  of  sodium  and  copper,  which  apart  from  the  large 
difference  in  the  absolute  values  of  the  spectral  terms  possess  a 
completely  analogous  structure,  as  previously  mentioned  in  this 
essay.  On  the  whole  we  must  expect  that  the  spectra  of  elements 
in  the  later  periods  lying  inside  a  frame  will  show  new  features 
compared  with  the  spectra  of  the  elements  in  the  first  three  periods. 
This  expectation  seems  supported  by  recent  work  on  the  spectrum 
of  manganese  by  Catalan,  which  appeared  just  before  the  printing 
of  this  essay. 

Before  I  leave  the  interpretation  of  the  chemical  properties  by 
means  of  this  atomic  model  I  should  like  to  remind  you  once  again 
of  the  fundamental  principles  which  we  have  used.  The  whole 
theory  has  evolved  from  an  investigation  of  the  way  in  which 
electrons  can  be  captured  by  an  atom.  The  formation  of  an  atom 
was  held  to  consist  in  the  successive  binding  of  electrons,  this 
binding  resulting  in  radiation  according  to  the  quantum  theory. 


116         THE  STRUCTURE  OF  THE  ATOM  AND  THE 

According  to  the  fundamental  postulates  of  the  theory  this  binding 
takes  place  in  stages  by  transitions  between  stationary  states 
accompanied  by  emission  of  radiation.  For  the  problem  of  the 
stability  of  the  atom  the  essential  problem  is  at  what  stage  such  a 
process  comes  to  an  end.  As  regards  this  point  the  postulates  give 
no  direct  information,  but  here  the  correspondence  principle  is 
brought  in.  Even  though  it  has  been  possible  to  penetrate  con- 
siderably further  at  many  points  than  the  time  has  permitted  me 
to  indicate  to  you,  still  it  has  not  yet  been  possible  to  follow  in 
detail  all  stages  in  the  formation  of  the  atoms.  We  cannot  say,  for 
instance,  that  the  above  table  of  the  atomic  constitution  of  the 
inert  gases  may  in  every  detail  be  considered  as  the  unambiguous 
result  of  applying  the  correspondence  principle.  On  the  other  hand 
it  appears  that  our  considerations  already  place  the  empirical  data 
in  a  light  which  scarcely  permits  of  an  essentially  different  interpreta- 
tion of  the  properties  of  the  elements  based  upon  the  postulates  of 
the  quantum  theory.  This  applies  not  only  to  the  series  spectra 
and  the  close  relationship  of  these  to  the  chemical  properties  of  the 
elements,  but  also  to  the  X-ray  spectra,  the  consideration  of  which 
leads  us  into  an  investigation  of  interatomic  processes  of  an  entirely 
different  character.  As  we  have  already  mentioned,  it  is  necessary 
to  assume  that  the  emission  of  the  latter  spectra  is  connected  with 
processes  which  may  be  described  as  a  reorganization  of  the  com- 
pletely formed  atom  after  a  disturbance  produced  in  the  interior 
of  the  atom  by  the  action  of  external  forces. 

IV.   REORGANIZATION  OF  ATOMS  AND  X-RAY  SPECTRA 

As  in  the  case  of  the  series  spectra  it  has  also  been  possible  to  repre- 
sent the  frequency  of  each  line  in  the  X-ray  spectrum  of  an  element 
as  the  difference  of  two  of  a  set  of  spectral  terms.  We  shall  there- 
fore assume  that  each  X-ray  line  is  due  to  a  transition  between 
two  stationary  states  of  the  atom.  The  values  of  the  atomic  energy 
corresponding  to  these  states  are  frequently  referred  to  as  the 
"energy  levels"  of  the  X-ray  spectra.  The  great  difference  between 
the  origin  of  the  X-ray  and  the  series  spectra  is  clearly  seen,  how- 
ever, in  the  difference  of  the  laws  applying  to  the  absorption  of 
radiation  in  the  X-ray  and  the  optical  regions  of  the  spectra.  The 
absorption  by  non-excited  atoms  in  the  latter  case  is  connected 


PHYSICAL  AND  CHEMICAL  PROPERTIES  OF  THE  ELEMENTS    117 

with  those  lines  in  the  series  spectrum  which  correspond  to  com- 
binations of  the  various  spectral  terms  with  the  largest  of  these 
terms.  As  has  been  shown,  especially  by  the  investigations  of 
Wagner  and  de  Broglie,  the  absorption  in  the  X-ray  region,  on 
the  other  hand,  is  connected  not  with  the  X-ray  lines  but  with 
certain  spectral  regions  commencing  at  the  so-called  "absorption 
edges."  The  frequencies  of  these  edges  agree  very  closely  with  the 
spectral  terms  used  to  account  for  the  X-ray  lines.  We  shall  now 
see  how  the  conception  of  atomic  structure  developed  in  the  pre- 
ceding pages  offers  a  simple  interpretation  of  these  facts.  Let  us 
consider  the  following  question  :  What  changes  in  the  state  of  the 
atom  can  be  produced  by  the  absorption  of  radiation,  and  which 
processes  of  emission  can  be  initiated  by  such  changes  ? 

Absorption  and  emission  of  X-rays  and  correspondence 
principle.  The  possibility  of  producing  a  change  at  all  in  the 
motion  of  an  electron  in  the  interior  of  an  atom  by  means  of  radia- 
tion must  in  the  first  place  be  regarded  as  intimately  connected 
with  the  character  of  the  interaction  between  the  electrons  within 
the  separate  groups.  In  contrast  to  the  forms  of  motion  where  at 
every  moment  the  position  of  the  electrons  exhibits  polygonal  or 
polyhedral  symmetry,  the  conception  of  this  interaction  evolved  from 
a  consideration  of  the  possible  formation  of  atoms  by  successive 
binding  of  electrons  has  such  a  character  that  the  harmonic  com- 
ponents in  the  motion  of  an  electron  are  in  general  represented  in 
the  resulting  electric  moment  of  the  atom.  As  a  result  of  this  it 
will  be  possible  to  release  a  single  electron  from  the  interaction 
with  the  other  electrons  in  the  same  group  by  a  process  which 
possesses  the  necessary  analogy  with  an  absorption  process  on 
the  ordinary  electrodynamic  view  claimed  by  the  correspondence 
principle.  The  points  of  view  on  which  we  based  the  interpreta- 
tion of  the  development  and  completion  of  the  groups  during  the 
formation  of  an  atom  imply,  on  the  other  hand,  that  just  as  no 
additional  electron  can  be  taken  up  into  a  previously  completed 
group  in  the  atom  by  a  change  involving  emission  of  radiation, 
similarly  it  will  not  be  possible  for  a  new  electron  to  be  added 
to  such  a  group,  when  the  state  of  the  atom  is  changed  by 
absorption  of  radiation.  This  means  that  an  electron  which  belongs 


118         THE  STRUCTURE  OF  THE  ATOM  AND  THE 

to  one  of  the  inner  groups  of  the  atom,  as  a  consequence  of  an 
absorption  process — besides  the  case  where  it  leaves  the  atom 
completely — can  only  go  over  either  to  an  incompleted  group,  or 
to  an  orbit  where  the  electron  during  the  greater  part  of  its  revolu- 
tion moves  at  a  distance  from  the  nucleus  large  compared  to  the 
distance  of  the  other  electrons.  On  account  of  the  peculiar  conditions 
of  stability  which  control  the  occurrence  of  incomplete  groups  in 
the  interior  of  the  atom,  the  energy  which  is  necessary  to  bring 
about  a  transition  to  such  a  group  will  in  general  differ  very  little 
from  that  required  to  remove  the  particular  electron  completely 
from  the  atom.  We  must  therefore  assume  that  the  energy  levels 
corresponding  to  the  absorption  edges  indicate  to  a  first  approxi- 
mation the  amount  of  work  that  is  required  to  remove  an  electron 
in  one  of  the  inner  groups  completely  from  the  atom.  The 
correspondence  principle  also  provides  a  basis  for  understanding 
the  experimental  evidence  about  the  appearance  of  the  emission 
lines  of  the  X-ray  spectra  due  to  transitions  between  the  stationary 
states  corresponding  to  these  energy  levels.  Thus  the  nature  of  the 
interaction  between  the  electrons  in  the  groups  of  the  atom  implies 
that  each  electron  in  the  atom  is  so  to  say  prepared,  independently 
of  the  other  electrons  in  the  same  group,  to  seize  any  opportunity 
which  is  offered  to  become  more  firmly  bound  by  being  taken  up 
into  a  group  of  electrons  with  orbits  corresponding  to  smaller  values 
of  the  principal  quantum  number.  It  is  evident,  however,  that  on 
the  basis  of  our  views  of  atomic  structure,  such  an  opportunity  is 
always  at  hand  as  soon  as  an  electron  has  been  removed  from  one 
of  these  groups. 

At  the  same  time  that  our  view  of  the  atom  leads  to  a  natural 
conception  of  the  phenomena  of  emission  and  absorption  of  X-rays, 
agreeing  closely  with  that  by  which  Kossel  has  attempted  to  give 
a  formal  explanation  of  the  experimental  observations,  it  alsosuggests 
a  simple  explanation  of  those  quantitative  relations  holding  for  the 
frequencies  of  the  lines  which  have  been  discovered  by  Moseley  and 
Sommerfeld.  These  researches  brought  to  light  a  remarkable  and 
far-reaching  similarity  between  the  Rontgen  spectrum  of  a  given 
element  and  the  spectrum  which  would  be  expected  to  appear  upon 
the  binding  of  a  single  electron  by  the  nucleus.  This  similarity  we 
immediately  understand  if  we  recall  that  in  the  normal  state  of  the 


PHYSICAL  AND  CHEMICAL  PROPERTIES  OF  THE  ELEMENTS    119 

atom  there  are  electrons  moving  in  orbits  which,  with  certain 
limitations,  correspond  to  all  stages  of  such  a  binding  process  and 
that,  when  an  electron  is  removed  from  its  original  place  in  the 
atom,  processes  may  be  started  within  the  atom  which  will  corre- 
spond to  all  transitions  between  these  stages  permitted  by  the 
correspondence  principle.  This  brings  us  at  once  out  of  those 
difficulties  which  apparently  arise,  when  one  attempts  to  account 
for  the  origin  of  the  X-ray  spectra  by  means  of  an  atomic  structure, 
suited  to  explain  the  periodic  system.  This  difficulty  has  been  felt 
to  such  an  extent  that  it  has  led  Sommerfeld  for  example  in  his 
recent  work  to  assume  that  the  configurations  of  the  electrons  in 
the  various  atoms  of  one  and  the  same  element  may  be  different 
even  under  usual  conditions.  Since,  in  contrast  to  our  ideas,  he 
supposed  all  electrons  in  the  principal  groups  of  the  atom  to  move 
in  equivalent  orbits,  he  is  compelled  to  assume  that  these  groups 
are  different  in  the  different  atoms,  corresponding  to  different 
possible  types  of  orbital  shapes.  Such  an  assumption,  however,  seems 
inconsistent  with  an  interpretation  of  the  definite  character  of  the 
physical  and  chemical  properties  of  the  elements,  and  stands  in  marked 
contradiction  with  the  points  of  view  about  the  stability  of  the  atoms 
which  form  the  basis  of  the  view  of  atomic  structure  here  proposed. 

X-ray  spectra  and  atomic  structure.  In  this  connection  it  is 
of  interest  to  emphasize  that  the  group  distribution  of  the  electrons 
in  the  atom,  on  which  we  have  based  both  the  explanation  of  the 
periodic  system  and  the  classification  of  the  lines  in  the  X-ray 
spectra,  shows  itself  in  an  entirely  different  manner  in  these  two 
phenomena.  While  the  characteristic  change  of  the  chemical 
properties  with  atomic  number  is  due  to  the  gradual  development 
and  completion  of  the  groups  of  the  loosest  bound  electrons,  the 
characteristic  absence  of  almost  every  trace  of  a  periodic  change  in 
the  X-ray  spectra  is  due  to  two  causes.  Firstly  the  electronic 
configuration  of  the  completed  groups  is  repeated  unchanged  for 
increasing  atomic  number,  and  secondly  the  gradual  way  in  which 
the  incompleted  groups  are  developed  implies  that  a  type  of  orbit, 
from  the  moment  when  it  for  the  first  time  appears  in  the  normal 
state  of  the  neutral  atom,  always  will  occur  in  this  state  and  will 
correspond  to  a  steadily  increasing  firmness  of  binding.  The  develop- 


120         THE  STRUCTURE  OF  THE  ATOM  AND  THE 

raent  of  the  groups  in  the  atom  with  increasing  atomic  number, 
which  governs  the  chemical  properties  of  the  elements  shows  itself 
in  the  X-ray  spectra  mainly  in  the  appearance  of  new  lines.  Swinne 
has  already  referred  to  a  connection  of  this  kind  between  the  periodic 
system  and  the  X-ray  spectra  in  connection  with  Kossel's  theory. 
We  can  only  expect  a  closer  connection  between  the  X-ray  pheno- 
mena and  the  chemical  properties  of  the  elements,  when  the  con- 
ditions on  the  surface  of  the  atom  are  concerned.  In  agreement 
with  what  has  been  brought  to  light  by  investigations  on  absorp- 
tion of  X-rays  in  elements  of  lower  atomic  number,  such  as  have 
been  performed  in  recent  years  in  the  physical  laboratory  at  Lund, 
we  understand  immediately  that  the  position  and  eventual  struc- 
ture of  the  absorption  edges  will  to  a  certain  degree  depend  upon 
the  physical  and  chemical  conditions  under  which  the  element 
investigated  exists,  while  such  a  dependence  does  not  appear  in 
the  characteristic  emission  lines. 

If  we  attempt  to  obtain  a  more  detailed  explanation  of  the 
experimental  observations,  we  meet  the  question  of  the  influence 
of  the  presence  of  the  other  electrons  in  the  atom  upon  the  firmness 
of  the  binding  of  an  electron  in  a  given  type  of  orbit.  This  influence 
will,  as  we  at  once  see,  be  least  for  the  inner  parts  of  the  atom, 
where  for  each  electron  the  attraction  of  the  nucleus  is  large  in 
proportion  to  the  repulsion  of  the  other  electrons.  It  should  also 
be  recalled,  that  while  the  relative  influence  of  the  presence  of  the 
other  electrons  upon  the  firmness  of  the  binding  will  decrease  with 
increasing  charge  of  the  nucleus,  the  effect  of  the  variation  in  the 
mass  of  the  electron  with  the  velocity  upon  the  firmness  of  the 
binding  will  increase  strongly.  This  may  be  seen  from  Sommerfeld's 
formula  (11).  While  we  obtain  a  fairly  good  agreement  for  the 
levels  corresponding  to  the  removal  of  one  of  the  innermost  electrons 
in  the  atom  by  using  the  simple  formula  (11),  it  is,  however,  already 
necessary  to  take  the  influence  of  the  other  electrons  into  considera- 
tion in  making  an  approximate  calculation  of  the  levels  corresponding 
to  a  removal  of  an  electron  from  one  of  the  outer  groups  in  the 
atom.  Just  this  circumstance  offers  us,  however,  a  possibility  of 
obtaining  information  about  the  configurations  of  the  electrons  in 
the  interior  of  the  atoms  from  the  X-ray  spectra.  Numerous 
investigations  have  been  directed  at  this  question  both  by 


PHYSICAL  AND  CHEMICAL  PROPERTIES  OF  THE  ELEMENTS    121 

Sommerfeld  and  his  pupils  and  by  Debye,  Vegard  and  others.  It 
may  also  be  remarked  that  de  Broglie  and  Dauvillier  in  a  recent 
paper  have  thought  it  possible  to  find  support  in  the  experimental 
material  for  certain  assumptions  about  the  numbers  of  electrons  in 
the  groups  of  the  atom  to  which  Dauvillier  had  been  led  by  con- 
siderations about  the  periodic  system  similar  to  those  proposed  by 
Langmuir  and  Ladenburg.  In  calculations  made  in  connection  with 
these  investigations  it  is  assumed  that  the  electrons  in  the  various 
groups  move  in  separate  concentric  regions  of  the  atom,  so  that 
the  effect  of  the  presence  of  the  electrons  in  inner  groups  upon  the 
motion  of  the  electrons  in  outer  groups  as  a  first  approximation 
may  be  expected  to  consist  in  a  simple  screening  of  the  nucleus. 
On  our  view,  however,  the  conditions  are  essentially  different,  since 
for  the  calculation  of  the  firmness  of  the  binding  of  the  electrons 
it  is  necessary  to  take  into  consideration  that  the  electrons  in  the 
more  lightly  bound  groups  in  general  during  a  certain  fraction  of 
their  revolution  will  penetrate  into  the  region  of  the  orbits  of 
electrons  in  the  more  firmly  bound  groups.  On  account  of  this 
fact,  many  examples  of  which  we  saw  in  the  series  spectra,  we  can 
not  expect  to  give  an  account  of  the  firmness  of  the  binding  of  the 
separate  electrons,  simply  by  means  of  a  "screening  correction" 
consisting  in  the  subtraction  of  a  constant  quantity  from  the  value 
for  N  in  such  formulae  as  (5)  and  (11).  Furthermore  in  the  calcu- 
lation of  the  work  corresponding  to  the  energy  levels  we  must  take 
account  not  only  of  the  interaction  between  the  electrons  in  the 
normal  state  of  the  atom,  but  also  of  the  changes  in  the  configu- 
ration and  interaction  of  the  remaining  electrons,  which  establish 
themselves  automatically  without  emission  of  radiation  during  the 
removal  of  the  electron.  Even  though  such  calculations  have  not 
yet  been  made  very  accurately,  a  preliminary  investigation  has 
already  shown  that  it  is  possible  approximately  to  account  for  the 
experimental  results. 

Classification  of  X-ray  spectra.  Independently  of  a  definite 
view  of  atomic  structure  it  has  been  possible  by  means  of  a  formal 
application  of  Kossel's  and  Sommerfeld's  theories  to  disentangle 
the  large  amount  of  experimental  material  on  X-ray  spectra.  This 
material  is  drawn  mainly  from  the  accurate  measurements  of 


122         THE  STRUCTURE  OF  THE  ATOM  AND  THE 

Siegbahn  and  his  collaborators.  From  this  disentanglement  of  the 
experimental  observations,  in  which  besides  Sommerfeld  and  his 
students  especially  Smekal  and  Coster  have  taken  part,  we  have 
obtained  a  nearly  complete  classification  of  the  energy  levels  corre- 
sponding to  the  X-ray  spectra.  These  levels  are  formally  referred 
to  types  of  orbits  characterized  by  two  quantum  numbers  n  and  k, 
and  certain  definite  rules  for  the  possibilities  of  combination 
between  the  various  levels  have  also  been  found.  In  this  way  a 
number  of  results  of  great  interest  for  the  further  elucidation  of 
the  origin  of  the  X-ray  spectra  have  been  attained.  First  it  has 
not  only  been  possible  to  find  levels,  which  within  certain  limits 
correspond  to  all  possible  pairs  of  numbers  for  n  and  k,  but  it  has 
been  found  that  in  general  to  each  such  pair  more  than  one  level 
must  be  assigned.  This  result,  which  at  first  may  appear  very 
surprising,  upon  further  consideration  can  be  given  a  simple 
interpretation.  We  must  remember  that  the  levels  depend  not 
only  upon  the  constitution  of  the  atom  in  the  normal  state,  but 
also  upon  the  configurations  which  appear  after  the  removal 
of  one  of  the  inner  electrons  and  which  in  contrast  to  the  normal 
state  do  not  possess  a  uniquely  completed  character.  If  we  thus 
consider  a  process  in  which  one  of  the  electrons  in  a  group 
(subgroup)  is  removed  we  must  be  prepared  to  find  that  after  the 
process  the  orbits  of  the  remaining  electrons  in  this  group  may  be 
orientated  in  more  than  one  way  in  relation  to  one  another,  and 
still  fulfil  the  conditions  required  of  the  stationary  states  by  the 
quantum  theory.  Such  a  view  of  the  "complexity"  of  the  levels,  as 
further  consideration  shows,  just  accounts  for  the  manner  in  which 
the  energy  difference  of  the  two  levels  varies  with  the  atomic 
number.  Without  attempting  to  develop  a  more  detailed  picture 
of  atomic  structure,  Smekal  has  already  discussed  the  possibility 
of  accounting  for  the  multiplicity  of  levels.  Besides  referring  to 
the  possibility  that  the  separate  electrons  in  the  principal  groups 
do  not  move  in  equivalent  orbits,  Smekal  suggests  the  introduction 
of  three  quantum  numbers  for  the  description  of  the  various  groups, 
but  does  not  further  indicate  to  what  extent  these  quantum 
numbers  shall  be  regarded  as  characterizing  a  complexity  in  the 
structure  of  the  groups  in  the  normal  state  itself  or  on  the 
contrary  characterizing  the  incompleted  groups  which  appear 
when  an  electron  is  removed. 


PHYSICAL  AND  CHEMICAL  PROPERTIES  OF  THE  ELEMENTS    123 

It  will  be  seen  that  the  complexity  of  the  X-ray  levels  exhibits  a 
close  analogy  with  the  explanation  of  the  complexity  of  the  terms 
of  the  series  spectra.  There  exists,  however,  this  difference  between 
the  complex  structure  of  the  X-ray  spectra  and  the  complex 
structure  of  the  lines  in  the  series  spectra,  that  in  the  X-ray 
spectra  there  occur  not  only  combinations  between  spectral  terms, 
for  which  k  varies  by  unity,  but  also  between  terms  corre- 
sponding to  the  same  value  of  k.  This  may  be  assumed  to  be 
due  to  the  fact,  that  in  the  X-ray  spectra  in  contrast  to  the  series 

Niton 


p 

6 

0, 

\ 

0 

I 

h 

&  

0-A 

N 

2/  

6 

/,  

aA. 

f, 

M 

1 

(, 

" 

* 

af. 

ia 

L 

n 

«A 

K 

f*t  — 

£ 

& 

Fig.  5. 

spectra  we  have  to  do  with  transitions  between  stationary  states 
where,  both  before  and  after  the  transition,  the  electron  concerned 
takes  part  in  an  intimate  interaction  with  other  electrons  in  orbits 
with  the  same  principal  quantum  number.  Even  though  this 
interaction  may  be  assumed  to  be  of  such  a  nature  that  the 
harmonic  components  which  would  appear  in  the  motion  of  an 
electron  in  the  absence  of  the  others  will  in  general  also  appear 
in  the  resulting  moment  of  the  atom,  we  must  expect  that  the 
interaction  between  the  electrons  will  give  rise  to  the  appearance 
in  this  moment  of  new  types  of  harmonic  components. 


124 


THE  STRUCTURE  OF  THE  ATOM  AND  THE 


It  may  be  of  interest  to  insert  here  a  few  words  about  a  new 
paper  of  Coster  which  appeared  after  this  address  was  given, 
and  in  which  he  has  succeeded  in  obtaining  an  extended  and 
detailed  connection  between  the  X-ray  spectra  and  the  ideas 
of  atomic  structure  given  in  this  essay.  The  classification  men- 
tioned above  was  based  on  measurements  of  the  spectra  of  the 
heaviest  elements,  and  the  results  in  their  complete  form,  which 
were  principally  due  to  independent  work  of  Coster  and  Wentzel, 
may  be  represented  by  the  diagram  in  fig.  5,  which  refers  to 
elements  in  the  neighbourhood  of  niton.  The  vertical  arrows 


Xenon 


Krypton 


o- 

(/, 

& 

•% 

.     —  t, 

1 

Va  

L 

'-'-*<," 

4s.  

h  — 

1  

13, 

b 

T»  
?, 

T~ 

o 

,1 

3 

ESi 

-V 

I 

.    f 

,  (0 

a              I 

2*. 

!l 
ll 

f  I 

a.      L\ 

9  r 

K  f, 

t>    X 

ft. 

Fig.  6. 

represent  the  observed  lines  arising  from  combinations  between 
the  different  energy  levels  which  are  represented  by  horizontal  lines. 
In  each  group  the  levels  are  arranged  in  the  same  succession  as 
their  energy  values,  but  their  distances  do  not  give  a  quantitative 
picture  of  the  actual  energy-differences,  since  this  would  require  a 
much  larger  figure.  The  numbers  nk  attached  to  the  different  levels 
indicate  the  type  of  the  corresponding  orbit.  The  letters  a  and  6 
refer  to  the  rules  of  combination  which  I  mentioned.  According 
to  these  rules  the  possibility  of  combination  is  limited  (1)  by  the 
exclusion  of  combinations,  for  which  k  changes  by  more  than  one 
unit,  (2)  by  the  condition  that  only  combinations  between  an  a- 
and  a  6-level  can  take  place.  The  latter  rule  was  given  in  this 


PHYSICAL  AND  CHEMICAL  PROPERTIES  OF  THE  ELEMENTS    125 

form  by  Coster;  Wentzel  formulated  it  in  a  somewhat  different 
way  by  the  formal  introduction  of  a  third  quantum  number.  In 
his  new  paper  Coster  has  established  a  similar  classification  for  the 
lighter  elements.  For  the  elements  in  the  neighbourhood  of  xenon 
and  krypton  he  has  obtained  results  illustrated  by  the  diagrams 
given  in  fig.  6.  Just  as  in  fig.  5  the  levels  correspond  exactly  to 
those  types  of  orbits  which,  as  seen  from  the  table  on  page  113, 
according  to  the  theory  will  be  present  in  the  atoms  of  these  ele- 
ments. In  xenon  several  of  the  levels  present  in  niton  have  dis- 
appeared, and  in  krypton  still  more  levels  have  fallen  away.  Coster 
has  also  investigated  in  which  elements  these  particular  levels 
appear  for  the  last  time,  when  passing  from  higher  to  lower  atomic 
number.  His  results  concerning  this  point  confirm  in  detail  the 
predictions  of  the  theory.  Further  he  proves  that  the  change  in 
the  firmness  of  binding  of  the  electrons  in  the  outer  groups  in 
the  elements  of  the  family  of  the  rare  earths  shows  a  dependence 
on  the  atomic  number  which  strongly  supports  the  assumption  that 
in  these  elements  a  completion  of  an  inner  group  of  4-quanta 
orbits  takes  place.  For  details  the  reader  is  referred  to  Coster's 
paper  in  the  Philosophical  Magazine.  Another  important  con- 
tribution to  our  systematic  knowledge  of  the  X-ray  spectra  is 
contained  in  a  recent  paper  by  Wentzel.  He  shows  that  various 
lines,  which  find  no  place  in  the  classification  hitherto  considered, 
can  be  ascribed  in  a  natural  manner  to  processes  of  reorganization, 
initiated  by  the  removal  of  more  than  one  electron  from  the 
atom ;  these  lines  are  therefore  in  a  certain  sense  analogous  to 
the  enhanced  lines  in  the  optical  spectra. 

CONCLUSION 

Before  bringing  this  address  to  a  close  I  wish  once  more  to 
emphasize  the  complete  analogy  in  the  application  of  the 
quantum  theory  to  the  stability  of  the  atom,  used  in  explaining 
two  so  different  phenomena  as  the  periodic  system  and  X-ray 
spectra.  This  point  is  of  the  greatest  importance  in  judging  the 
reality  of  the  theory,  since  the  justification  for  employing  con- 
siderations, relating  to  the  formation  of  atoms  by  successive  capture 
of  electrons,  as  a  guiding  principle  for  the  investigation  of  atomic 


126  THE  STRUCTURE  OF  THE  ATOM 

structure  might  appear  doubtful  if  such  considerations  could  not 
be  brought  into  natural  agreement  with  views  on  the  reorgani- 
zation of  the  atom  after  a  disturbance  in  the  normal  electronic 
arrangement.  Even  though  a  certain  inner  consistency  in  this 
view  of  atomic  structure  will  be  recognized,  it  is,  however,  hardly 
necessary  for  me  to  emphasize  the  incomplete  character  of  the 
theory,  not  only  as  regards  the  elaboration  of  details,  but  also  so 
far  as  the  foundation  of  the  general  points  of  view  is  concerned. 
There  seems,  however,  to  be  no  other  way  of  advance  in  atomic 
problems  than  that  which  hitherto  has  been  followed,  namely  to  let 
the  work  in  these  two  directions  go  hand  in  hand. 


RETURN 
TO—  ^                               COLLEGE  LIBRARY,  UCLA 

LOAN  PERIOD  1 

2 

3 

4 

5 

6 

DUE  AS  STAMPED  BELOW 


4  MAR  '80  RECCL 

J»S    '80  14  DAY 

17XLWW.O! 

114E)AYAPR15'87 

W02W  14  DAY 

REC'D  CL  MAY  2     W 

UNIVERSITY  OF  CALIFORNIA,  LOS  ANGELES,  CA.  90024 


: 


UCLA-College  Library 

QC  451  B63E  1922 


L  005  662  276  4 


College 
Library 

oc 


1922 


A  A      000238035    o